Home

Solution-16/ Solution-16 Safecom Installation Manual

1. IN BLACK TOP VIEW i RED CONTROL to E PANEL OUT YELLOW l OUT E RJ45 PLUG Black Telecom Line Street Green Internal Phone Line Red Telecom Line Street Yellow Internal Phone Line TELECOM CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR CHINA TOP VIEW TOP VIEW BLACK CONTROL RED l Li PANEL GREEN J YELLOW 4P4C PLUG RJ12 PLUG Green Internal Phone Line Yellow Internal Phone Line Black Telecom Line Street Red Telecom Line Street 3 Not Connected 4 Not Connected Telecom Line Internal Phones Telecom Line TE Telecom Line REAR VIEW OF TELEPHONE PLATE Internal Phones Figure 26 Telecom Connection Diagrams For Solution 16 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 202 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Appendices This Section Includes The Following e Telephone Anti Jamming e Test Reports Only When Armed 204 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Appendix A Telephone Anti Jamming There are many companies today importing American designed products that claim to have Anti Jamming and believe it or not they push this feature as if it were a major break through in control panel technology Well this in fact is not the case at all as most control panels have some sort of Anti
2. If unsuccessful the dialler will try twice more using the Primary Telephone Number after which the Secondary Telephone Number will be called three times This procedure will be repeated only once again ie Maximum of 12 call attempts per alarm after ten minutes if none of the first six attempts were successful Note When programming the telephone number if a 0 is required it must be programmed as a 10 Please contact your monitoring station or pager company for the relevant telephone numbers before programming this location ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Base Station Information 93 Secondary Telephone Number LOCATION 016 031 JoJo oojoo ooo of of of of of of Refer to the Primary Telephone Number for programming information I TE TT Number LOCATION 032 047 ooo oojoo oojoo oojoo This location contains the telephone number that will be called when Upload Download is requested or the number e button is held down to initiate a modem call from the control panel to establish a communications link with the remote computer The computer must be running the Alarm Link Software CC816 and will need to be set to Waiting For An Incoming Call The Callback Telephone Number is also required to be programmed if Remote Connect With Callback Verification on page 70 is required Dialling Format LOCATION 048 H The method for dialling telephone numbers is entered here Options 3 and
3. System Normal O System Fault 1 Figure 3 Basic Pager Display The example in Figure 3 Basic Pager Display shows that the transmission has come from Subscriber ID Number 678 and that Zone 2 is in alarm Zone 3 has been manually isolated the system is armed the panic zone is normal the AC is connected and there is no fault condition Note Basic Pager Format Only Supports Zones 1 8 ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Reporting Formats 85 PET Alpha Pager Reporting The Solutian 16 control panel is capable of transmitting PET Alpha characters at the rate of 300 baud to a pocket pager using the PET Protocol Page Entry Terminal Using this method of reporting will allow people who are on the move to monitor burglary alarms medical alarms refrigeration alarms and virtually any other event that can be used to trigger the Solutian 14 control panel Programming and Hardware Requirements To use PET Alpha Pager Reporting Format the following programming and hardware options are required 1 The EDM Modem Module CC811 or CC811B will be required to be fitted to the AUXILIARY MODULE socket on the control panel Note Some pager companies use the BELL communication frequencies and others use the CCITT frequencies It is important to obtain this information from the pager company so that you can connect the appropriate modem module for the format used Use EDM Modem Module CC811 for Telecom
4. This output allows connection of a serial printer to be used to log all reports with a date and time stamp Refer to LOCATION 756 on page 89 to select the required baud rate that the serial printer will communicate System Armed This output will operate when the system is armed in the AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 It will reset when the system has been disarmed If the system has been partitioned this event will operate when all areas have been armed in either AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 System Disarmed This output will operate when the system is in the disarmed state It will reset as soon as the system becomes armed If the system has been partitioned this event will operate when all areas have been disarmed Armed In STAY Mode This output will operate when the system has been armed in STAY Mode or STAY Mode 2 When the system has been partitioned this event will operate when any area has been armed in STAY Mode or STAY Mode 2 Armed In AWAY Mode Software Version 1 20 Onwards This output will operate when the system has been armed in the AWAY Mode and will reset when the system is next disarmed If the system has been partitioned this event will operate when any area has been armed in the AWAY Mode Pre Arming Alert Time Software Version 1 10 This output will operate during the time period before the control panel will automatically arm in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 Once the control panel has automatically armed
5. Reporting Formats 77 Securitel The Solutian 16 control panel can communicate to base stations via the Securitel Network using an EDMSTU CS800 Not all messages can be transmitted via securitel as they can via the communication dialler transmitting in Contact ID Format Refer to Table 31 Securitel Reporting Messages below for the list of messages that are supported by securitel Event Location Page No Alarms and Restores 340 467 Zone Bypass Reports 468 471 Zone Trouble Reports 472 475 Open Close Reports 504 505 Codepad Panic 480 483 Table 31 Securitel Reporting Messages Note Zone bypass and zone trouble reports are not transmitted separately They are transmitted as one combined isolate report How To Program and Setup Securitel To connect and setup the EDMSTU follow the procedures below Program the Subscriber ID Number in LOCATION 052 055 Program Output 2 as all zero s in LOCATION 546 552 Disable Option 1 in LOCATION 663 if the control panel is not going to use the on board dialler Connect the EDMSTU to the Solutian 16 control panel using the table below Once the EDMSTU has been connected to the control panel the EDMSTU will now need to be upped by the monitoring station e ode T Solution 16 EDMSTU Output D O o gt l COM l Table 32 EDMSTU Connection Terminals Refer to your EDMSTU Installation Manual for further information Securitel and Part
6. Solution 16 Solution 16 Safecom Installation Manual Exit Warning Finished This output operates when the exit time has expired if the system has been armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode or STAY Mode 2 The output will reset when the system has been disarmed Kiss Off After End Of Exit Time This output will operate after the first successful transmission to the base station receiver when exit time has expired The output will reset when the system has been disarmed Entry Warning This output will operate when either Entry Timer 1 Entry Timer 2 Entry Timer 3 Entry Timer 4 or Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode are operating The output will reset when the entry time expires Entry Warning Day Alarm Resetting This output combines both Entry Warning and Day Alarm Resetting so that either of these two events will activate the output If the output has been triggered by either Entry Timer 1 Entry Timer 2 Entry Timer 3 Entry Timer 4 or Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode the output will reset once the entry timer has expired or the system has been disarmed If the output has been triggered by a zone programmed for day alarm the output will reset when the zone has resealed Day Alarm Resetting This output will operate when a zone programmed for day alarm has been triggered The output will reset when the day alarm zone has resealed Day Alarm Latching This output will operate when a zone programmed for day alarm has been triggered The output
7. ooooooncccnocononooonconnonnconnconncnnccnnnnnnos 120 Area EE 174 Ar iii Ea E ai 174 Ee ee e 174 AA EE 174 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Index First To Open Last To Close 151 173 In STAY Mode 1 151 173 INSTA Y Mode eegener ier Eege 151 173 Only If Previous Alarm Occurred 004 151 173 Optional Equipment 16 Zone LED Codepad 186 2 Channel Radio Interface REOOS eee 187 2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface eee 187 8 Channel Output Board 185 8 Zone Area Codengd 186 8 Zone Expansion Board OK 185 8 Zone Expansion Board Variable 185 8 Zone LED Codenad 185 8 Zone Master Partitioned Codepad 186 Cellular Dialler coo ae aaa dee E 186 Codepad Mimic Board 187 Daller Amplier Lead 185 Direct Link Cable ssrin ing 185 EDMS TU 184 Hand Held Dialler Tester 186 Hand Held Programmer 184 JP5 Terminal Block 185 Modem Module 184 Night Arm Station c oooonooonocnnonononccononnnonncnnnonnonnnnanonns 186 Phone Controller ceccesceeseeseeeeeeseeeseeeteeeseeeeeeaes 186 Programming Ken 184 PS100 Power Supp 186 Radio Key Keyswitch Interf ee 187 Relay Output Interface oooooocononincnnocnonnconnconccnnonnss 187 Satellite Siren eer Sida ecg eae 184 Telephone Line Fault Module 185 TF008 Plug Pack 186 Voice Module 184 Bu A EE 125 O tp t TO nia 125 Output RE 125 EI EEN 125 Opt ita das doce edyerientts ceo Se 125 Output As eaten das 125 QUUpUt E 125 A
8. 653 will extend by one hour Refer to Output Event Type Pre Arming Alert Time on page 127 if you required an indication via a programmable output during the Pre Alert Timer ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Event Timers 145 Auto Operation Pre Alert Timer LOCATION 655 s Location Description 655 Auto Operation Pre Alert Timer Table 91 Auto Operation Pre Alert Timer Locations This location sets the amount of time in minutes 0 15 that will operate an output programmed with the Output Event Type Pre Alert Warning For Timed Output on page 128 to warn you before the timed output will automatically operate Refer to LOCATION 656 659 for programming the output time operation Refer to Output Event Types on page 127 for more information Auto Operation Of The Timed Output LOCATION 656 659 ololola Location Description Actual Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Actual Minute Of The Day Tens Digit Actual Minute Of The Day Units Digit Table 92 Auto Operation Of The Timed Output Locations Actual Hour Of The Day Units Digit These locations set the time of the day that an output programmed with Output Event Type Timed Output will automatically operate Refer to Output Event Types on page 127 for more information This time must be set in 24 hour format ie 10 30 PM would be programmed as 2230 LOCATION 660 Location Description 660 Siren Run Time
9. 9FG NOILLYIOT ZLNO L Figure 9 Anaao U0139UNy 0 spedapo2 yo0sddD aqess ippy Leary 24 103 pawue1Bold aq zsnw suoevoj Buimojlog ay L VIV dw E eeh A gt gt gt SE gt oo ae e VIV KEE KEE ONO 19 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Tava IIA Sie O 9 LIDCH WOEN D s DEN AWM MAA SNIVA OH LH WEE Mein De SNIVA OH Ausl LHCE AWitW Die SNWN OH Mos awg 0 uono aA A Sien WOH q J l lt D Connections For CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P Codepad and CP5 Area Addressable CP500A Codepads ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 181 Partitioning SOTO 16 Solution AREA 1 AREA 2 AREA 3 AREA 4 The following locations must be programmed for the Area Addressable CP500A codepads to function correctly LOCATION 667 Enable Option 1 Main Codepad To Display Data For Area 1 OUT1 LOCATION 540 6 541 1 OUT2 LOCATION 546 6 547 2 OUT3 LOCATION 552 6 553 3
10. Defaulting Enabled 15 Defaulting Disabled H WENNER Page 148 Location 901 Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Location 902 Hour Of The Day Units Digit Location 903 Minute Of The Day Tens Digit Location 904 Minute Of The Day Units Digit Pofojo o Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Index 220 2 2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface 187 24 Hour Fire Zone 106 24 e 106 A AC EE 43 118 Tay Ve e 154 Tn 2 Mites EE 154 AC Mains Fuer 156 ACCESS Denied at ia 118 Acknowledge Tone Extend Detection From 30 To 60 Seconds 166 A larim BEE 69 150 Modem Module ricota 154 Terminate On Alarm 150 Alarm Link Software 185 Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm 159 Answering Machine Bypass c ceseee 96 151 173 Only When Armed s sessessesesesserseesersreseeseese 151 173 Appendices metia 203 Area 1 Codepad Data 154 Area Display Indicators ooooonoonnnninnincnnncnonnconncnnccnnonnos 170 Area On Off Indicators oooociconionnocnnonconnconnconorononnnonnss 170 Arming All Areas At Same Tume c ooooonnnnccccnnoncccnonnnos 50 60 159 Auto Arm In AWAY Mode ossee 155 Auto Arm In STAY Mode 1 155 156 e 144 AWAY Moderada 35 61 Enable Single Button Arming eeeeeeeeeeeeees 159 Latching Input For Arm Disarm In AWAY Model61 163 Momentary Input Arm Disarm In AWAY Model61 162 Pre Alert Automatic Am 144 STAY Mode liinda i nica 36 STAY Mode ENN 38 Via Telephone cimas asii 66 ASCII Characters
11. Figure 10 Connections For CP5 Area Addressable CP500A Codepads ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 182 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Optional Equipment 184 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual Optional Equipment EDM manufactures numerous accessories that can be used in conjunction with the Salutian 16 control panel These optional pieces of equipment will enhance certain features thus making the system extremely flexible EDMSAT Satellite Siren SS914 The EDMSAT Satellite Siren is a totally self contained unit incorporating a high powered siren and a weatherproof strobe A 1 2 AH sealed lead acid battery needs to be fitted The EDMSAT requires only two wires for operation on which the charging of the battery and triggering of the siren and strobe are carried out This is done by pulse code modulating PCM the charging voltage Any attempt to tamper with the wiring or to substitute an alternative power source across the wiring will disrupt the data transmission and the EDMSAT will activate immediately When the EDMSAT carries out a battery test the unit will sound for two seconds if the battery test fails EDMSTU Securitel Interface CS800 This EDMSTU Securitel Interface has been designed to operate in conjunction with the Salutian 16 control panel using a serial connection
12. Increments Of 1 Minute Table 93 Siren Run Time Locations The siren run time determines how long the horn speaker will activate during alarm condition The siren run time can be programmed between 0 15 minutes 1 minute Siren Sound Rate LOCATION 661 H Location Description Siren Sound Rate 0 SLOWEST 15 FASTEST Table 94 Siren Run Time Locations The siren sound rate varies the frequency of the siren tone Zero rate is the slowest and fifteen is the fastest rate This siren sound rate does not change the frequency rate for the fire alarm tone Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 146 Solution 16 Solutiaon 16 Safecom Installation Manual Swinger Shutdown Count LOCATION 662 Software Version 1 10 1 37 o Location Description Swinger Shutdown Count 0 15 Table 95 Swinger Shutdown Count Locations Swinger shutdown determines the amount of times the sirens and dialler can be triggered before any lockout options will take effect A minimum of one zone must be programmed for lockout siren or lockout dialler for swinger shutdown to be effective Only alarms triggered from zone inputs will increment the swinger shutdown counter This means alarms such as codepad panic code retries and any other system alarms will not effect the swinger shutdown count While the sirens are operating the counter for the sirens is only incremented by the first zone that causes the alarm A
13. Programming Sheets 210 Location 000 015 Primary Telephone Number Location 016 031 Secondary Telephone Number Location 032 047 Callback Telephone Number Location 048 Dialling Format Location 049 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Page 92 Page 93 Page 93 1 Australian DTMF 2 Australian Decadic 3 Alternate DTMF 8 Decadic AUST 4 International DTMF 5 Reversed Decadic 6 Alternate DTMF 8 Reversed Decadic Page 94 1 HI LO Handshake Contact ID 4 No Handshake Required Handshake Tone 2 1400 Hz Ademco TX 1900 Hz 5 Pager 3 2300 Hz Sescoa TX 1800 Hz saat 1 Contact ID 6 4 1 Pulsed Expanded 11 Domestic Transmission Format 2 4 2 Expressed 7 3 1 Pulsed Universal 12 Basic Pager 3 4 2 Pulsed 8 3 1 Pulsed Expanded 13 Reserved 4 4 2 Pulsed Checksum 9 Reserved 14 PET Alpha Pager 5 4 1 Pulsed Universal 10 Reserved 15 Synthesised Voice Beef 1 1 Pulse Second 4 20 Pulses Second Transmission Speed 2 10 Pulses Second 5 20 Pulses Second FDL 3 15 Pulses Second 6 40 Pulses Second Location 05205 Page 96 Subscriber ID Number ofofo ol Location 056 062 VVV P Page 98 Into Code CEEE Location 063 O O O O E Page 96 s 15 Answering Machine Bypass 1 Ring Count 14 Answering Machine Bypass 2 New Software Version 1 37 Onwards Location 064 319 VV P Page 98 User Codes User Code 1 Location 064 071 User
14. ccceceeseescesccesccesceseceseceneceeececeseeesecesecnseceeeeeeseeeseceseceaeceeeceeseseseeeenseseseseeeseeeeneensees 104 Zone ELE 104 Zone DPS A A A A iE eRe 105 Ol Instant LOMA A AA A te ae ten he tees 105 E Handover Zone sek EE ENEE 105 22 Delays A ssecssvescs vata cette via O edtedgeleeeeedeti egen 105 3 Delay 2 Zoic OO NT 105 ES Delay 3 EE 105 SE E EE 105 6 Instant Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 105 7 Handover Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 105 8 Delay 1 Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 105 9 Delay 2 Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 106 10 Delay 3 Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 106 11 Delay 4 Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 106 12 24 Hour Burglary Zone eorn iri EE de EES NNN SEENEN ENT 106 13 A E 106 14 Ehime Zone Follow MO eiii 106 15 LENA da 106 Zone O dass 107 1 amp 2 Lockout Siren amp Lockout Daller 107 Are Silent Ad E 107 8 SENSO Watch 2 02 nce Sect male Ai tic ce atest es teeta pete Bestel nthe dee deen loaned cate 108 Zone Pulse ee 108 Zone Pulse Colt Hand VEER 109 Zone Pulse Count MME EEN 109 Dam Ad Ee e EE 110 Day Alarm LEE 110 Day Alarm GET 110 Day Alarm Operation Software Version 1101 111 Day Alarm Operation Software Version 1 20 Omwardest nro nnnn nono ron ron n ron ran rrnn rra nnnnnnos 111 Day Alarm In Partition iii 111 FOL Resistor Med 112 SYSTEM STATUS INFORMATION o ssisisccssscssssscsscnsscecssssecdacesscacsssssenacensssecsansssedscnssseesscsssescensscsss
15. e ELECTRONICS DESIGN amp MANUFACTURING Solution 16 Solution 16 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE 2 10 This page has been included for you to cut out and insert into the spine of the folder ELECTRONICS DESIGN amp MANUFACTURING MA880I Solution 16 Solution 16 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE 2 10 ty Aust ES 61 2 9672 1777 Solution 16 Ssalutian 16 SIFECOm Installation Manual Copyright 1999 by Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited SYDNEY AUSTRALIA Document Part Number MA8801 Document Issue 2 10 Printed 09 08 99 This documentation is provided to suit SofusCiaqn 1 G Control Panel CC880 LP880 SC8016 Firmware Revision 1 10 2 02 Hardware Revision E K This installation manual includes programming locations to suit both Solution 16 CC880 LP880 and the Solution 16 Safecom SC8016 control panel Locations that are only relevant when using the SC8016 are prefixed with the word Safecom Copyright Notice All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced transmitted or stored in a retrieval system in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written permission of Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited Trademarks Throughout this document trademark names may have been used Rather than put a trademark symbol in every oc
16. symbol represents the zone or area number in the transmission The following example shows how a single transmission will be displayed via the serial printer connected to output 3 A similar message to the one below will be seen when the alarm system is armed by user 1 Date Time Event 09 12 96 12 30 42 System Armed By User Table 40 Example Serial Printer Log Report For the wiring diagram for the 25 Pin Logging Printer and the 9 Pin Printer please refer to Figure 18 19 Page 197 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 90 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual System Event Printer Log Report Table 41 Serial Printer Messages ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Base Station Information This Section Includes The Following e Base Station Information e Primary Telephone Number e Secondary Telephone Number e Callback Telephone Number e Dialling Format e Handshake Tone e Transmission Format e Transmission Speed e Subscriber ID Number e Ring Count 92 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Base Station Information This section outlines the programming information required for the Solutian 16 control panel when communicating with base station receivers Typically these parameters specify the telephone numbers to call the transmission formats handshake tones and transmission speeds How To Program A Phone Number
17. 156 Delay Until Transmission Complete 155 156 Operate In STAY Mode 157 A A TEE 145 Sound Rates iia 145 Sirens Operate In STAY Mode 158 Smart Lockout ceeceeessessessecneceeceeeeeeeeceseeseeeeeeaees 152 Software Version Number 28 208 Solution Codepad Mimic Board 187 Solution Relay Output Interface 187 Specifications urona ra a a S 208 Split EOL Resistors For 16 Zone Operation 196 Status Indicators ooooonconconocnonoonnonconcnncnncnncnn iinei 170 STAY Indieator dn a e E 32 34 STAY Mode 1 36 er TE 61 Automatic Arm 155 156 RIED 37 Enable Single Button Arming ococonconncnnnconcnnconcnnnn 159 Enable Single Button Disarming ooncnicnicnnnnnnnnn 159 Entry Guard Time cui 157 Entry Guard Timer eceeceeeceesceseeseeeteeeeeeeeeeeeees 141 Momentary Input 163 Single Button Armmg sammmng 61 STAY Mode 2 ATM dida ia 38 61 Disarming sanna a cee estore ele 39 Enable Single Button Arming oconconconccconcononnnoncnnnn 159 Enable Single Button Disarming eee 159 Entry Guard Time ENER 157 Entry Guard mer 141 Momentary Input 163 Programming Zones oococccocnnonnnonanononnnconnnonncnnncnnncnnnoo 59 Single Button Arm Dsamm oooococicnnonnnononnnconnconcnnnonnss 61 Siren eiert A a eie 62 Subscriber ID Number oooonconconococonoconncononnnoncnncnncnncnnnonos 96 ATCA lid ida 175 AT do da did 175 ATCA E 175 ATi 175 Swinger Shutdown Dilluns aaa 147 er EE 1
18. CP500P codepad are configured in to four groups Following is a description of what the indicators show Zone Indicators Zone indicators 1 8 display the status of each zone These zones belong to the area that has the AREA DISPLAY indicator illuminated ie If a ZONE indicator is illuminated that zone is unsealed and if the ZONE indicator is not illuminated that zone is sealed 2 Areas On Off Indicators The group of four AREA DISPLAY indicators show the status of each area ie If an indicator is illuminated that area is armed and if the indicator is not illuminated that area is disarmed 3 Area Display Indicators A group of four AREA DISPLAY indicators show what area the zones belong to that are currently being displayed 4 Status Indicators A group of four indicators show the following ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Partitioning 171 AUX Indicator This indicator will display the status of Zone 16 when the control panel has been partitioned If Option 4 has been enabled in LOCATION 669 the AUX indicator may be used to display when the control panel is using the telephone line MAINS Indicator This indicator displays the status of the AC mains supply ie If the MAINS indicator is illuminated the AC mains is normal and if the indicator is flashing the AC mains has been disconnected FAULT Indicator This indicator displays the status of the systems fault register ie If the
19. Contact ID Event Code 401 is transmitted at the end of exit time when the system has been armed in the AWAY Mode If an expanded format has been selected this code will be used as the expansion code and the user number that armed or disarmed the system will follow in the same transmission Refer to LOCATION 664 on page 151 for enabling Open Close reports in STAY Mode To enable Open Close reports only after a previous alarm refer to LOCATION 664 on page 151 Note If you do not require Open Close reports program LOCATION 504 505 with zero ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Status Information 121 LOCATION 760 763 Lejh Safecom Only Location Description ei Contact ID Event Code Hundreds Digit 760 761 Contact ID Event Code Tens Digit Or Alarm Or Expansion Digit In 4 2 Format 2 63 76 Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or Channel Location For All Other Formats 7 Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 or 4 Point ID 48 Decimal An RF Fail report Contact ID Event Code 353 will be transmitted to the base station when the safecom unit misses a poll or fails contact with the base station Receiver A restore signal will be transmitted when radio communication is restored Safecom Telco Fail LOCATION 764 767 alen Safecom Only Location Description Alarm Or Expansion Digit In 4 2 Format Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or Channel Location Fo
20. Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode sses 141 Entry Time EE 140 Entry Timer ie sortie cette Re Re eee tee 140 Entry Timer 2 lacio riada is 140 Entry Timer ii 140 Entry Eimer A dese tine ca aa Meee 140 EOL Resistor Value ai 112 Event Codes vii eerie 73 104 Event Met ug ENEE 47 Event Memory Recall 55 Exit Time AWAY Modest sisas 141 STAY Mode Leet 141 STAY Mode AEE AN EEN EA EAA 141 Expansion Board Enable 8 Channel Output Board 161 162 Enable 8 Zone Expansion Board 161 162 F Factory Detalla ee 29 FAULT AC Mains Fal 43 O ested E 63 Analysis Mode 42 Communications Fal 43 Date and Time ee tee 42 Descritor deeoehdeaes 42 A cath ee eee 43 Horn Speaker oesie 43 Indicator 33 34 171 A seesseta test egiteshivenzesctvcseeatesedeede stoned 43 LOW Ball Viatri 42 Sensor Watch 02000 otitis 42 Zone 16 Barpponed 43 Fire Alarmi ia 40 Forced Armmg 35 36 38 152 Enable cocoa iii 152 ISSUE210 DOC 222 G General Reporting Formats 75 H Hand Held Dialler Tester 186 Hand Held Programmer 184 Handover Sequential Handover 153 Handover Zone aan E ee 105 Handover Zone Isolate In STAY 1 0 eee 105 Handshake Tone cccccesceseesseeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeneenaees 94 Hold Down Functions Arm In AWAY Mode 61 Arm In STAY Mode 1 61 Arm In STAY Mode 7 61 A e RRE E 62 Codepad ID and Buzzer Tone Change 64 Fault Analysis ooooncnnoconoconononnnnnnonnonnncnncnnnnnonoonon nooo 63 Horn Speaker Test 61 Initi
21. Event Codes Event Description Event Description Event Description Medical Alarms 24 Hour Non Burglary Peripheral Troubles 100 Medical 150 25 Hour Non Burg 330 System Peripheral Gas Detected Fire Alarms 153 Loss Of Heat 333 Exp Module Failure 110 154 334 111 Smoke 155 Foil Break 335 Lel Printer Paper Out 117 Flame Fire Supervisory 352 Telecom Line 2 Fail 121 Duress Alarm 203 Gate Valve Sensor 356 Loss Of Central Poll g 131 Perimeter 300 System Trouble 373 Fire Trouble 142 Polling Loop Short Sounder Relay Troubles 143 Exp n Module Fail 320 SounderiRelay CO o Sensor Tamper sa ra ES CExp n Module Tamper 322 Bel2 O A E a SC S au roble Relay i a Reversing ll A EC Table 27 Contact ID Event Codes os See E Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 74 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Point ID Codes Point ID Event Description Event Code Explanation Page Zone Specific Burglary Zones 1 7 and 9 16 130 Burglary 104 Zone Specific Burglary Zone 8 24 Hour 133 24 Hour Burglary 104 User Specific Open Close 401 Fixed Opening User 120 Closing User User Specific Open Close Partitioned 402 Fixed Opening Group User Closing Group User 030 301 031 309 040 Duress Alarm LL 121 Codepad Duress Alarm G oa 042 043 306 T E 045 Fire Alarm 110 Fixed Codepad Fir
22. One is to check the message and the other is used during an alarm condition The first replay mode is to check the message with the crystal earpiece connected By pressing the Record Replay switch once the voice module will replay the message it currently has stored so that it can be checked for accuracy and clarity This mode will automatically terminate as soon as the programmed message has been completely replayed The second replay mode occurs when an alarm condition occurs and the control panel that the voice module is connected to dials the programmed telephone numbers This can be achieved by triggering a zone or by sending a test report Once triggered the control panel will dial the programmed telephone number and commence playing its recorded voice message The message consists of a 90 second period during which time the recorded voice message will be repeated continuously The 90 second timer commences as soon as the last digit of the telephone number has been dialled At the end of the 90 seconds the control panel will send two beeps followed by a pause This will be repeated over a 20 second period During this pause the control panel looks for an acknowledge tone If it is received within the next 20 seconds the control panel will hang up and make no further calls ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Reporting Formats 83 Connection Of The Voice Module The Voice Module plugs onto the AUXILIARY MODULE
23. amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone Programming 105 Zone Types There are sixteen different zone types to choose from Each zone has the ability to be programmed as any one of the types listed below Zone Type Description Zone Type Description en 8 Delayel Isolated In STAY Mode 1 Handover f o lay 2 isolated in STAY Mode 1 2 Delay f o Delay 3 Isolated in STAY Mode Y s Deea Delay lated in STAY Mode Y Dey CECR 10 11 12 Delay 4 13 24 Hour Fire 14 15 Instant Isolated In STAY Mode 1 14 Chime Only Handover Isolated In STAY Mode 1 Is Zone Not Used Table 48 Zone Types f 0 Instant Zone An Instant zone will sound the sirens and operate the dialler as soon as it registers as unsealed after the exit time has expired Handover Zone A Handover zone will act as an instant zone if it has been triggered by itself If a handover zone is triggered after a delay zone the remaining delay time will handover from the delay zone to the handover zone Handover may be sequential or random Refer to Option 2 in LOCATION 666 on page 153 if you require handover to be sequential or non sequential 2 Delay 1 Zone A Delay 1 zone will have a delay time determined by the value in Entry Timer 1 on page 140 3 Delay 2 Zone A Delay 2 zone will have a delay time determined by the value in Entry Timer 2 on page 140 4 Delay 3 Zone A Delay 3 zone will have a delay time determined by the value in
24. away button will toggle you to the next area display Arm The System In STAY Mode 1 Holding the stay J button down until two beeps are heard will arm the system in STAY Mode 1 Option 2 in LOCATION 670 on page 159 will need to be enabled for this function to operate If there has not been an alarm during the armed cycle holding the STAY button down a second time will disarm the system from STAY Mode 1 Option 4 in LOCATION 670 on page 159 will need to be enabled for this hold down function to operate If an alarm has occurred or entry warning has been triggered a valid user code will need to be used to disarm the system If the system has been partitioned holding down the STAY button on the CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad will only arm the area that the codepad belongs to in STAY Mode 1 This function does not operate on the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad Arm The System In STAY Mode 2 Holding the oj button down until two beeps are heard will arm the system in STAY Mode 2 Option 2 in LOCATION 670 on page 159 will need to be enabled for this function to operate If there has not been an alarm during the armed cycle holding the oj button down again until two beeps are heard will disarm the system Option 4 in LOCATION 670 on page 159 will need to be enabled for this hold down function to operate If an alarm has occurred or entry warning has been triggered a valid user code will need to be used
25. button considered as the Lal button ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 21 Programming Using The Programming Key The Programming Key CC891 is a unique device that will allow you to easily program your control panel Inserting the programming key will automatically initiate a data transfer from the programming key to the control panel memory If you have a new programming key you should first enter the Installer s Programming Mode configure your control panel as per your requirements before inserting the programming key To connect the programming key locate the connections marked PROGRAMMING KEY This point can be found on the right hand side of the control panel Observe the triangular markings on the printed circuit board and line them up with the markings on the programming key To copy the control panel s data into your new programming key enter command 9 76 72 followed by the AWAY button Refer to Command 962 Copy Control Panel Memory To Programming Key on page 25 for further details Exit the Installer s Programming Mode by entering the command 2lelal followed by the AWAY button wait two seconds for the activity LED to return to its normal state and then remove the programming key This programming key will now become your standard data pattern for future programming of your control panels It should be noted that when entering the Installer s Programming Mode inserting a prog
26. e button down until two beeps are heard A ZONE indicator will illuminate If no ZONE indicator illuminates the codepad cannot be used when the system has been partitioned Z1 Area One Codepad Z2 Area Two Codepad Z3 Area Three Codepad Z4 Area Four Codepad Z7 CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad 2 Press the away button to exit this mode How To Change The Tone Of The Buzzer 1 To change the tone of the codepad buzzer hold the e button down continuously The tone of the buzzer will start to increase in pitch 2 If the codepad is a CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad or a CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad two beeps will be heard indicating the area that the codepad belongs to as in above when you determine which area that the codepad belongs to when the system has been partitioned Shortly after hearing the two beeps the tone of the buzzer will start to increase in pitch Ranges from 1500 Hz 5000 Hz 3 Release the s button when the desired tone has been reached Press the away button to exit this mode Leg 9 initiate A Test Report Holding the j button down until two beeps are heard will transmit a Test report which is used to test the dialling and reporting capabilities of the system without causing the sirens to sound A Test report will not be transmitted if the Subscriber ID Number is 0000 This feature is only applicable if the control panel has a dialler hybr
27. on page 152 has been enabled the horn speaker will give identification beeps when the system has been armed and disarmed One beep indicates that Area 4 has been disarmed two beeps will indicate that Area 4 has been armed in AWAY Mode Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 164 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual Telephone Line Fault Options LOCATION 673 Lo Description Operate The FAULT Indicator When Telephone Line Fails Sound Speaker Bell and Strobe When System Is Armed Sound Speaker Bell and Strobe When System Is Disarmed Table 114 Telephone Line Fault Options The optional Telephone Line Fault Module CC887 may be connected to the LINE FAULT MODULE socket located towards the top right hand corner of the control panel to monitor the telephone line If the telephone line has been cut or disconnected for more than forty seconds the telephone line fault module will recognise this and the FAULT indicator will illuminate on the codepad The FAULT indicator will extinguish once the telephone line has been restored for more than forty seconds Note Option 2 and 4 will not operate unless option 1 has been enabled If option 1 has been enabled and no telephone line fault module has been connected to the control panel a FAULT indicator will illuminate and LOCATION 673 will need to be programmed back to the factory default value to clear the fault Operate The FAULT Indicator
28. 0 0 0 0 Not Used 0 0 Not Used 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 Not Used Table 5 Command 965 Defaults As you can see from the table above all reporting other than zone alarms have been disabled The handshake tone has been set for 1400 Hz tone acknowledgment and the Subscriber ID Number has been set for one identification beep The zone reporting has been set so that any zone that triggers into alarm condition will only report when the alarm occurs the zone restore report will not report as there is no separate indications for zone alarm reports and zone alarm restore reports Note From Software Version 1 30 Command 965 disables zone restore reports Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 28 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Command 966 Enable Disable Automatic Stepping Of Locations This command enables or disables the automatic stepping of locations while programming When enabled via the hand held programmer the decimal point of the left most display will reflect the mode of operation If the decimal point is illuminated then auto step mode is active An automatic increment of the location being programmed will occur as soon as the D button is pressed positioning you at the next location ready for programming If the decimal point is extinguished the auto step mode is disabled The next programming location will need to be manually selected by pressing the button As you ca
29. 199 H 223 H 247 H 271 a 295 H 319 H Access Codes 101 Auxiliary Codes Auxiliary Codes can be used to operate programmable outputs Refer to Output Event Types 2 12 and 2 13 on page 131 for further information Auxiliary Codes can be any length from one to seven digits long Any unused location should be programmed with the value 15 The priority level Which is the last location of each Auxiliary Code controls the behaviour of the code allowing the code to operate when the system is armed or disarmed etc Refer to Table 47 Auxiliary Code Priority Levels below for the available options Auxiliary Code 1 LOCATION 320 327 15 J15 J15 J15 Jis Jas Jis al Auxiliary Code 2 LOCATION 328 335 15 J15 J15 Jas Jis Jas Jis al Priority Level Description Operate When The System Is Armed Operate When The System Is Disarmed Operate When The System Is Armed Or Disarmed Operate If Armed amp No Alarm Memories Are Present Operate If Disarmed amp No Alarm Memories Are Present Operate If Armed Or Disarmed amp No Alarm Memories Are Present a Operate Always As Long As No Alarm memories Are Presem E Table 47 Auxiliary Code Priority Levels When the control panel has been partitioned the Auxiliary Codes are global to all areas This means that an output that is controlled from an Auxiliary Code can be operated from all areas Auxiliary Codes cannot be dedicated to an a
30. A Patrolman Code will allow you to issue a code that will only disarm the system after an alarm has occurred This will prevent unauthorised use of the code A Patrolman Code can always arm the system This code is designed to work in conjunction with Open Close reports to gain maximum benefit Refer to LOCATION 664 on page 151 to enable Open Close Reports To Be Transmitted Only After An Alarm Has Occurred Arming Disarming Allowed Code To Isolate This priority level allows arming and disarming of the control panel Isolating of zones will only be allowed by using the method Code To Isolate once this priority level has been set Refer to Isolating Zones on page 41 for further information Patrolman Code Code To Isolate This priority level allows the Patrolman Code to disarm the system once an alarm has occurred Isolating zones will only be allowed by using the method Code To Isolate once this priority level has been set A Patrolman Code can always arm the system Refer to Isolating Zones on page 41 for further information Master Code Functions Are Allowed This priority level allows arming and disarming of the control panel and the ability to carry out any of the Master Code Functions described on page 50 More than one user code can be allocated to this priority level Master Code Functions Are Allowed Code To Isolate This priority level allows arming and disarming of the control panel and the ability to carry out any of t
31. Alarm code in all other reporting formats Refer to Event Codes on Page 73 Units Digit The units digit of the Contact ID Event Code is programmed into this location This location is the Channel code that the zone reports on in other reporting formats other than Contact ID Format Refer to Event Codes on Page 73 Dialler Channel This location is factory default to report on dialler channel 1 If the system has been partitioned zones allocated to report on areas other than Area 1 should have their dialler channel correspond to the area number that the zone is allocated to Refer to Event Codes on Page 73 Zone Zone Zone Pulse Zone Pulse Hundreds Tens Units Dialler Type Option Count Count Time Digit Digit Digit Channel Zone Defaults Zone 1 Location 340 347 Zone 2 Location 348 355 2 pofofofrfafoj rjofojolrfsjo Zone 3 Location 356 363 Zone 4 Location 364 371 Zone 5 Location 372 379 rjofojofrfafofr rfofojofrfafofr rfofofof fafof Zone 6 Location 380 387 Zone 7 Location 388 395 Zone 8 Location 396 403 ojofofolrfsfofr leidt rfojofofr sf3 Zone 9 Location 404 411 Zone 10 Location 412 419 Zone 11 Location 420 427 ojofojofrfsfofr ofofojofrfafofr ofofofof fsfof Zone 12 Location 428 435 Zone 13 Location 436 443 Zone 14 Location 444 451 ojofofofrfsfofr lidd ofojofofr sfof Zone 15 Location 452 459 Zone 16 Location 460 467 ojofolofrfsfofr Oooo ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design
32. Chime QUIEN eh is Ba hs 106 LONG TYPO EN 106 Code Rete cocida 101 Codepad Cha Eight Sixteen Zone LCD 34 CP5 Eight Zone LED cococonoconoconoconoconnconncnonccnnononoonnoo 32 Dufess Alari speed eetecte chante ec 40 Duress Report edd EE NEEN 116 Extinguish Mode oooonocnioonocnconononconcinncnnncanocnnoos 157 158 Fire Alda ata 40 ID and Buzzer Tone Change 64 Lockout Time cani 142 Medical Alarm 0 ccccecceeseeseeeseeseeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeneeaes 40 Panic Alarm 2o 2 viene cascesaeve lada 40 Panic Report EE 117 Panic To Be Slent nren 153 Tamper To Be Silent 153 Codepad Indicators AUC DIG eege eege deeg 33 AWAY Sonia 32 34 A E 34 PAUL De ra 33 34 Isolatine Mode cia tia 34 EN Le EE 33 Off Indicator Zone Sealed oooooonncnnnnnccnocnoonconnconoo 34 On Indicator Zone In Alarm 34 STAY ii 32 34 ZONES iii geed 32 34 Codepads Area 1 Codepad As Main Codepad oooonncccnccioncconono 179 Area 1 Codepad Sep 179 Area 2 Codepad Setup 179 Area 3 Codepad Sep 179 Area 4 Codepad Setup 179 Master Partitioned Codepad Setup 179 Command 958 Enable Disable Zone Stats 23 959 Test Programming Key 24 960 Exit Installer s Programming Mode 24 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Index 961 Default Swvstem eeceeeseeeeeseeetseeeeeneees 24 962 Copy Control Panel Token 25 964 Erase Programming Ken 26 965 Domestic Dialling oooooonncnncnnonnnocononcnononnonns 27 966 Enab
33. Codepad Operatpong 171 Master Partitioned Codepad oooconncniocnnonnoonconcnanonnss 170 Master Partitioned Codepad Setup ooooocoinccinnconcooo 179 ECHT i siete GM ee Eege 171 User Code Allocations oooooocccnncnnocnnocconnconncononnnonnos 178 Zone Allocapons 176 Patrolman Code 99 PET Alpha Pager TD CHL 88 Password EE 87 Programming amp Hardware Requirements 85 Reporting Asia Senta Eet alec eaten tetas 85 Reporting Messages 86 Telecom Access Telephone Nos 85 Phone Controller ceceeceesceeseeeseeseeeseeeneeeeeeseesneeaes 186 Point ID Codina ei 74 Power Up Disarmed an 165 Primary Telephone Number 92 Printer Output BAUD Rate 89 Program Altered Code 119 PEO SPAMMING engsten ege lets EEN 18 Disable Factory Default ooooonnonncnncniccnicnnocnconononcnnno 29 Domestic Format 78 ISSUE210 DOC Solution 16 Solution 16 Safecom Installation Manual DTMF Command Module 22 Entry Exat Tamers ai 140 Edit ea eee a 24 Hand Held Programmer 20 Installer s Programming Commande 23 Option Bitst neni kd Se ee ied Sit BS 22 Uu E 124 Programming Ken 21 Telephone Numbers cecceeseeseeseeeeeeeeseeeteeesees 92 With Codepad ic ss Se ee anes 19 Programming Ken 24 184 Copy Control Panel To ke 25 ET An oo da 26 Programming Mode 34 Programming Sheet 209 PS100 Power Supply Module 186 Pulso CO cacas leia tise arios bad 108 SEN rita 154 TM ia 109 Q Quick alta 15 R Radio Key Keys
34. EE ENEE 125 Output Ainsa diras 125 RI ue EE 125 Output O iii 125 A O Eeler 125 OVPU S erioa ta 125 Opt tai ii iia ias 125 Output Event Type E UE 128 AC Mains 60 Hz Or a0Hs 132 Alarm In AWAY Mode 130 Alarm In STAY Mode 130 Any Areas A 133 Any Areas Disar Med coooonocnnnnnocnnonononcnnncnnnonnnonnnnononns 133 Area 1 Codepad Data 133 Area 1 Has Zone Unsealed 132 Area 1 In Alarm ooocnnnninnninnnonnnoncnoncnnncnn nono nonnncnnnnns 132 Area I ls Armed econo ciente 133 Area 1 Is Disarmed nunen 133 Area 2 Codepad Data 133 Area 2 Has Zone Unsealed 132 Arca 2 MATI iii it a 132 A R 133 223 Area 2 Is Disarmed oooconooccnonncoooncooncconnnonnnccnnnncnnnnnoo 133 Area 3 Codepad Data 133 Area 3 Has Zone Unsealed oooonocccnoccconncconncconncons 132 Area Td Alan ita 132 Area 3 Is Armed nienean s 133 Area 3 Is Disarmed oooconocccnocccoonncoonnconnnonnnccnnnncnnnnno 133 Area 4 Codepad Data 133 Area 4 Has Zone Unsealed ooooonoocinoccnonncionncconacins 132 Area 4 In Alarm 132 Arca dls Anime airis sosaeesvesedstivent 133 Area 4 Ierseng es 133 Armed In AWAY Mode 127 Armed In STAY Mode 127 Auxiliary Code T cnica tics 131 Auxiliary Code Z resserre 131 CHIME E 132 Codepad Duress Alarm 129 Codepad Fire Alarm ccecceeseeeseeseeeteeeeeeeeeeeees 129 Codepad Medical Alam 129 Codepad Panic Alarm 129 Codepad Tamper c cceccceseeseeseeeneeeeenseeseeeeees 129 Communications Failure oooonnoccc
35. Entry Timer 3 on page 140 5 Delay 4 Zone A Delay 4 zone will have a delay time determined by the value in Entry Timer 4 on page 140 6 instant Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 This zone will act as an Instant zone when the system is armed in the AWAY Mode but will be automatically isolated when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 7 Handover Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 This zone will act as a Handover zone when the system is armed in the AWAY Mode but will be automatically isolated when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 8 Delay 1 Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 This zone will act as a Delay 1 zone when the system is armed in the AWAY Mode but will be automatically isolated when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 106 10 11 12 13 14 15 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Delay 2 Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 This zone will act as a Delay 2 zone when the system is armed in the AWAY Mode but will be automatically isolated when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 Delay 3 Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 This zone will act as a Delay 3 zone when the system is armed in the AWAY Mode but will be automatically isolated when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 Delay 4 Zone Isolated In STAY Mode 1 This zone will act as a Delay 4 zone when the system is armed in the AWAY Mode but will be automatically isolated when
36. Event Type 1 1 Refer to page 128 How To Turn An Output OFF From The Remote Codepad 1 Enter your master cope followed by 5 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Enter the required OUTPUT no followed by the STAY button Two beeps will be heard and the output will turn off Repeat step 2 if more than one output is required to be turned off Press the AWAY button to exit this mode Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish MASTER CODE 5 away OUTPUT No era away Output Number 1 Output Event Type 2 8 Refer to page 131 Output Number 2 Output Event Type 2 9 Refer to page 131 Output Number 3 Output Event Type 2 10 Refer to page 131 Output Number 4 Output Event Type 2 11 Refer to page 131 Output Number 5 Output Event Type 1 1 Refer to page 128 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 58 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual 6 Setting The Date and Time This function needs to be used when the date and time requires to be changed or the system has been powered down How To Set The New Date and Time 1 Enter your master cone followed by D and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Enter the day month year hour and minute using the DD MM YY HH MM
37. Exit Installer s Programming Mode AAA MEA Defaulting The Control Panel If the Solutian 16 control panel does not have LOCATION 900 programmed as 15 follow the procedure outlined below to successfully default the control panel back to the factory default settings How To Default The Control Panel 1 Disconnect the AC mains and backup battery from the control panel 2 Hold down and continue to hold down the DEFAULT button located at the top of the printed circuit board 3 Reconnect the AC mains to the control panel 4 After reconnecting the AC mains wait for 3 5 seconds before releasing the DEFAULT button You will hear the dialler seize relay RL2 on the control panel click once and two beeps will be heard on the remote codepad The control panel will now need to be disarmed by using the default Master Code 2580 The control panel has now been successfully defaulted back to the factory default settings Note If following the above procedure to default the control panel and you hear the dialler seize relay RL2 click four times defaulting the control panel has been disabled The control panel will need to be returned to Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited for exchange where a service fee will be charged to unlock the control panel s memory Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 30 Solution 14 Solutidon 14 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufact
38. ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs 135 8 Normally Low Going Open This polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs The output will switch back to zero volts when the event has restored Time parameters are not applicable to this polarity 9 Normally Low Pulsing Open This polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to pulsing open circuit when the event occurs It will switch back to zero volts when the event has restored Time parameters vary the On time of the pulse 10 Normally Low One Shot Open This one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs The output will switch back to zero volts when the time parameter has expired This one shot time setting will always run its full duration and cannot be manually reset 11 Normally Low One Shot Open With Retrigger This one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs Every time the event occurs it will restart the one shot timer The output will switch back to zero volts once the one shot time has expired 12 Normally Low One Shot Open With Reset This one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs The output will switch back to zero volts when the one shot time has expired or when the event has returned to normal This means the one shot timer can b
39. Includes The Following Programming Programming With The Remote Codepad Programming With The Hand Held Programmer Programming Using The Programming Key Programming Via The DTMF Command Module Programming Option Bits Installers Programming Commands Disable Factory Default Defaulting The Control Panel 18 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Programming The programming options of this control panel are stored in a non volatile EEprom This memory will hold all the relevant configuration and user specific data even during a total power loss The data retention time is as long as ten years without power therefore no reprogramming will be required after powering the control panel down The data can be altered as many times as required without the need for any additional specialised equipment This memory is laid out in numerous locations each of which holds the data for a specific function In general the entire programming sequence will consist of nominating the location number required and then entering or altering the data You will repeat this procedure until all the data has been programmed to suit your requirements The factory default settings have been selected for reporting in the Contact ID Format Note 15 is the maximum value that can be programmed into any location There are two programming modes The Installer s Programming Mode and the Operators Programming Mode Both programming modes have individua
40. Jamming feature We can go as far back as the early 1980 s where even the 678 diallers incorporated a form of Anti Jamming as a standard programmable option The important thing to note is that as most American designed products are primarily aimed at their local market and telephone networks when they are imported to Australia their anti jamming function does not perform as it should To clear up just what anti jamming is and how it works needs some understanding of Telephone Networks In America either of the two parties ie the one who initiated the call or the one receiving the call can clear the line by placing the hand piece back on the hook If you pick up the hand piece again dial tone will be received and you will be able to make a new call immediately This is not so here in Australia In Australia only the calling party can immediately terminate the call If you receive a call from someone and hang up on them picking the hand piece back up again to make a new call only reconnects you to the original caller It will not be possible to make another call until the original caller hangs up or you hang up phone for ninety seconds or longer So you see Australia is very different and needs a special form of anti jamming to suit our telephone network There are control panels on the market that after making a few call attempts which fail simply hang up and wait for ninety seconds or so in an attempt to clear the jamming incoming call This may
41. Location 726 User Code 3 Location 730 User Code 7 Location 734 User Code 11 Location 738 User Code 15 Location 742 User Code 19 Location 746 User Code 23 Location 750 User Code 27 Location 754 User Code 31 Refer to User Codes on page 98 for further programming information of the actual codes Select the required areas that the user code holder is to operate and then add the option values together from Table 130 User Code Allocations below eg If the user code is allocated to operate all four areas program a 15 ie 1 2 4 8 15 into the required location relevant to their user code allocation If the user code is allocated only to Area 1 and Area 3 ie 1 4 5 program their user code allocation as 5 Location 727 User Code 4 Location 731 User Code 8 Location 735 User Code 12 Location 739 User Code 16 Location 743 User Code 20 Location 747 User Code 24 Location 751 User Code 28 Location 755 User Code 32 Partitioning 179 Setting Up and Programming Codepads For Partitioning To connect area addressable codepads to a system that has been partitioned a few steps will need to be taken for the codepads to operate correctly Setting Up The Master Partitioned Codepad As The Main Codepad If you are using the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad as the main codepad of the partitioned system you will need to connect the codepad to the main codepad terminals GND 12V CLK
42. Mode H Latching Input For Arm and Disarm A toggle or latching keyswitch may be used to arm and disarm the system in the AWAY Mode via the JP5 pins EXP and GND If the system has been partitioned ALL areas will arm and disarm in the AWAY Mode If Option 8 in LOCATION 665 on page 152 has been enabled the horn speaker will give indication beeps when the system has been armed and disarmed One beep indicates that the system has been disarmed two beeps will indicate that the system has been armed in AWAY Mode Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 162 Solution 16 Solutiaon 16 Safecom Installation Manual Expansion Board Type LOCATION 672 Software Version 1 20 Onwards D Option Description i Description No Expansion Board Fitted Momentary Disarm Eight Zone Expansion Board Fitted Momentary Arm Area 4 Momentary Disarm Area 4 Momentary Arm Disarm Area 4 Latching Arm Disarm Area 4 Table 113 Expansion Board Type Software Version 1 20 Onwards This location enables the operation of an optional eight zone expansion board eight channel output board or a number of different options for keyswitch operated inputs to arm or disarm the system The keyswitch operated inputs need to be connected to the JP5 terminals EXP and GND Every time the system is armed or disarmed via the keyswitch operated input user code 32 will be transmitted with the Open Close reports Refer to Figure 18 Connection For Mo
43. Open Can Reset 5 Normally Open One Shot Low Retrigger 12 Normally Low One Shot Open Retrigger L 6 Normally Open LatchingLow o Normally Low Latching Open Table 71 Event Type Polarities Only For Software Version 1 10 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 136 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual Timing Of Outputs The timing of outputs is calculated by a time base and a multiplier These two values play different roles depending on the polarity selected When programming pulsing outputs both the On and Off times can be set One shot polarities can be timed between 200 ms up to 99 hours in duration Time Multiplier Base Tens Units The maximum value that can be programmed in the two multiplier locations is ICI Time Base 2 Second ______ 1 Minute 60 Seconds 1 Hour 60 Minutes Table 72 Time Base Settings The time base settings can be set to only one of the values listed in Table 72 Time Base Settings This is not like other options where more than one can be selected and the option numbers added together to give various combinations The multiplier value is a two digit decimal number from 00 99 For greater accuracy use 60 seconds for 1 minute intervals and use 60 minutes for one hour intervals Pulsing Polarities When calculating pulsing polarities both the On and Off times need to be set The duration or On time of an output
44. Paging CCITT frequencies and CC811B for BELL frequencies 2 The Primary Telephone Number in LOCATION 000 015 will require the PET Alpha Pager s Access Telephone Number 3 Option 5 Pager Reporting in LOCATION 049 will need to be enabled 4 Option 14 Alpha Pager in LOCATION 050 will need to be enabled 5 LOCATION 514 529 requires the PET Alpha Pager s network password 6 LOCATION 530 539 requires the 7 digit Alpha Pager ID Number Note All Contact ID Event Codes will require any ZERO in the Event Code to be programmed to other than zero If the Event Code has a zero the report for that event will not transmit to the PET Alpha Pager The Solutian 16 only communicates to the PET Network at the rate of 300 BAUD Telecom Access Telephone Numbers Each state has different access numbers to the PET Network The access telephone numbers to the Telecom Paging Networks for CCITT frequencies are as follows State Access Number State Access Number 02 9 281 9255 VIC TAS 0395104451 QLD 07 3 891 6824 SA NT 08 231 1493 09 3213528 KE Table 33 Telecom Access Telephone Numbers Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 86 Solution 14 Solutidon 14 Safecom Installation Manual PET Alpha Pager Messages This transmission format is the most informative method of reporting alarm activity to the end user When using the PET Alpha Pager Format the control panel will transmit all alarm
45. Reset On Disarm Location 671 DTMF Command Module Options 1 Enable Access Into Installer s Programming Mode 2 Enable Access To Installer Code Functions 4 Enable Disarming Of System Via User Codes and Auxiliary Code Operations 8 Enable Access To Master Code Functions Location 672 Software Version 1 10 Only Page 161 Expansion Board Type 1 Eight Zone Expansion Board P yP 2 Eight Channel Output Board 4 Momentary Keyswitch Input 8 Latching Keyswitch Input Location 672 New Software Version 1 20 Onwards Page 182 Expansion Board Tvpe 1 Eight Zone Expansion Board 7 Momentary Arm In STAY Mode 2 pa ard yP 2 Eight Channel Output Board 8 Momentary Disarm 3 Momentary Keyswitch Input 9 Momentary Arm Area 4 4 Latching Keyswitch Input 10 Momentary Disarm Area 4 5 Momentary Arm In AWAY Mode 11 Momentary Arm Disarm Area 4 6 Momentary Arm In STAY Mode 12 Latching Arm Disarm Area 4 Location673 O O OOO Page 164 Telephone Line Fault Options 1 Operate The FAULT Indicator When Telephone Line Fails 2 Sound Speaker Bell amp Strobe When System Is Armed 4 Sound Speaker Bell amp Strobe When System Is Disarmed Note Options 2 and 4 Must Be Used In Conjunction With Option 1 EG Program a 1 3 or 5 H Location 674 675 Page 174 Open Close Code For Area 2 oo A AS AA ONIS A NAS RETRO Pagod A Open Close Code For Area 3 Location 678 679 EENEG EH Open Close Code For Area 4 oo Location 680
46. System Options 3 LOCATION 667 0 le Description Enable Data Output To Display Data For Area 1 Partitioned Systems Only Enable External Modem Module For Alarm Link Operation Enabled AC Fail In 1 Hour Disabled AC Fail In 2 Minutes Enable Zone Pulse Count Handover Table 104 System Options 3 1 Enable Data Output To Display Data For Area 1 Partitioned Systems Only If this option has been enabled the DATA terminal on the panel will be configured to transmit status information that is relevant only to Area 1 A CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad would be used in this instance If this option is not enabled the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad will need to be used because information for all areas will be transmitted on the DATA terminal An advantage in using this option is that it allows you to configure a system into separate areas while still leaving the maximum number of programmable outputs available for other uses 2 Enable External Modem Module For Alarm Link If this option has been enabled the control panel will use the external plug in Modem Module CC811 for remote programming via the Alarm Link Software CC816 This option should only be enabled in situations where the telephone line is susceptible to noise If this option is not enabled the control panel will use its own built in modem 4 Enabled AC Fail In 1 Hour Disabled AC Fail In 2 Minutes If this option has been enabled the MAIN
47. This means that all alarm information can be transmitted from the control panel to the EDMSTU using only 3 wires The EDMSTU provides full serial reporting of alarms opening and closing reports isolations and user ID information The monitoring control room also monitors line integrity Hand Held Programmer CC814 The hand held programmer is used to program the locations in the Solutian 16 control panel The unit displays the actual location number and the data value currently programmed It comes complete with a one metre connecting cable and a socket for an external programming key Programming Key C891 The programming key is a unique device that will store all programming information programmed in your control panel once copied to the programming key The programming key can hold all your common configuration data such as monitoring station telephone numbers and zone reporting channels etc Modem Module CC811 This modem module is required when the control panel is to report to a PET Alpha Pocket Pager Protocol using the CCITT frequency Connection Ensure that all power is disconnected from the Salutian 14 control panel Locate the AUXILIARY MODULE socket on the printed circuit board and connect the modem module ensuring that the orientation of the triangular markings on the printed circuit board correspond to those on the modem module Modem Module CC811B This modem module is required when the control panel is to re
48. This will be useful to remotely display system status information The 3 way DIP switch on the board is used to select the data that is to be displayed on the relays Multiple interfaces may be connected in parallel for different data displays 2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface FAI01 The 2 Wire Smoke Detector Interface FA101 has been designed to allow high quality 2 wire 24 volt DC smoke detectors to be easily connected to the Solution range of control panels The interface provides the 24 volts required to power the smoke detector and also provides a relay output that is used to trigger the control panel Multiple detectors may be connected to the same interface Radio Key Keyswitch Interface CC813 This interface was designed to allow simple interfacing of a momentary keyswitch or radio equipment for remote control operations to operate the control panel If the R K terminal is used a number of momentary keyswitches may be connected in parallel for multiple arm disarm locations The ON and OFF terminals can be used to directly interface to any access control system For non partitioned control panels the HOME Mode terminal will force the system to arm and disarm in STAY Mode 1 There is also a PANIC terminal that allows the customer to issue a panic alarm from a remote keyswitch or hand held radio transmitter This is handy if you require your system to be radio controlled and you would like to give your customer total control via a
49. User ID relevant to that report If 4 2 Format is selected then no second line is transmitted and the reporting channel number is transmitted directly after the expansion code 3 1 4 1 3 1 4 1 Event Universal Expanded Alarm SSS S A SSS S A SSSS ACy AAA A Cy Trouble SSS S T SSS S T SSSS TCy TTT T Cy BBB B Cy EEE E Ac LLL L Lg Open SSS S O SSS S O SSSS OU OO oes e Close SSS S C SSS S C SSSS CU eee OS eee IT Test SSS S Tr SSS S Tg 3 1 4 1 3 1 4 1 Restore Universal Expanded Alarm SSSS S R SSS S R SSSS R CH ES m en O OO TRTRTR TR Cy Bypass SSS S Br SSS S Br SSSS Br Cu eee AA AC Fail SSS S Er SSS S Er SSSS Er Acr E O e e Low Battery SSS S Ler SSS S Ler SSSS Lar Lp Pr PA MA AAA Table 29 General Reporting Formats Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 76 Solution 14 Solutidon 14 Safecom Installation Manual Code Description Code Description SSSS__ Subscriber ID Number R AlamRestoreCode Cu Channel Number Ber BypassRestoreCode oo Lie S Ex LA Fail Restore Code I digit Acr B L Ik Tow Battery Restore Code 1 Digit i Ac AC Fail Code 2 Digit LR Duress Code Dei Leg Battery Code Da Dy Duress Code Digit Py Lies Battery Code2 Digt P Panic Code Da o on o ooo oa O o venm ll Table 30 3 1 4 1 Transmission Code Descriptions ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited
50. When Telephone Line Fails The FAULT indicator will flash and the codepad buzzer will beep once every minute if the Telephone Line Fault Module CC887 detects that the telephone line has been disconnected Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 42 for further information on telephone line fault 2 Sound Speaker Bell and Strobe When The System Is Armed Option 1 in LOCATION 673 will need to be enabled for this option to operate If the Telephone Line Fault Module CC873 detects that the telephone line has been disconnected when the system is armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 the horn speaker bell strobe and EDMSAT outputs will operate If the control panel has been partitioned this option will operate when any area has been armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 4 Sound Speaker Bell and Strobe When The System Is Disarmed Option 1 in LOCATION 673 will need to be enabled for this option to operate If the Telephone Line Fault Module CC887 detects that the telephone line has been disconnected when the system is disarmed the horn speaker bell strobe and EDMSAT outputs will operate If the system has been partitioned this option will operate only when ALL areas have been disarmed 8 Reserved Note If ALL three options have been enabled the horn speaker bell strobe and EDMSAT outputs will operate in either armed or disarmed state If a serial printer has been connected to output 3 the message Phone Line Failure wil
51. When programming the telephone number if a 0 is required it must be programmed as a 10 Each location in the primary secondary and callback telephone numbers hold one digit of the telephone number Example To program the telephone number 9 672 1055 you would program eAeko Programming The End Of A Phone Number To tell the dialler when the end of the telephone number has been reached a 0 must be inserted at the end of the telephone number Therefore the dialling sequence will be terminated when a zero appears Example To program the number 9 672 1055 completely you would program sJeJ7J2 io Js so Programming A Four Second Pause In The Phone Number To enter a four second pause in the dialling sequence you would need to program the value 13 This may be necessary when the dialler is communicating through an old slower telephone exchange or where a PABX system is in place Example To program the number 02 pause 9 672 1055 you would program I ee Jeje ee eo ss Digit Required Number To Program Digit Required Number To Program Pause G seo Are y EA AAA a Table 42 Dialling Digits LOCATION 000 015 oJ0J 0J 0J 0J 0J 0J 0J 0J 0J 0J 0J 0J o1 o o When the control panel has triggered the control panel will dial this number in an attempt to contact the monitoring station pager etc If the call is successful the relevant information will be transmitted and the dialler will return back to the stand by mode
52. alarm is active 2 Enable Operation Of Sirens amp Strobe In STAY Mode This option will need to be enabled if audible alarms are required when the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 4 Enable AUX LED To Display Telephone Line In Use On Partitioned Codepad If this option has been enabled the AUX indicator on a CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad will illuminate when the control panel has seized the telephone line to transmit a report The AUX indicator will extinguish once the telephone line has been released Note If the control panel has been partitioned and zone 16 has been used the AUX indicator will also be used to indicate when zone 16 has triggered into alarm 8 Enable Codepad Extinguish Mode If this option has been enabled all indicators on the remote codepads will extinguish if a button is not pressed for 60 seconds The indicators will illuminate when there is an alarm except a silent alarm when a button is pressed on the codepad when the AC mains fail beeps or if the entry timer has been activated ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Option Bits 159 Consumer Options 2 LOCATION 670 2 Description Enable User Code 0 AWAY Function To Arm Disarm All Areas Enable Single Button Arming In AWAY STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 Enable Single Button Disarming From STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 Enable Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm Table 110 Consumer Option
53. amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 20 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Programming With The Hand Held Programmer The Hand Held Programmer CC814 has five seven segment displays The three on the left display the location number and the two on the right display the data for that particular location To connect the hand held programmer locate the connections marked PROGRAMMING KEY This point can be found on the left hand side of the Solutian 16 printed circuit board Observe the triangular markings on the Solutian 16 printed circuit board and line them up with the markings on the hand held programmers connecting socket When the hand held programmer is correctly plugged onto the printed circuit board one beep will be heard and four centre bars on the hand held programmer will illuminate with either an A or U suffix to indicate the system is armed or unarmed Only when the Installer s Programming Mode has been accessed will any numerals appear on the display Note When connecting the hand held programmer to the control panel make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer is in the EXT position and that no external programming key has been connected Failing to do this may corrupt the control panel s memory If this happens the control panel will need to be returned to Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited where a service fee will be charged to unlock the control panel s memory Exa
54. and DATA There are three DIP Switches which ALL should be in the ON position Setting Up An Area 1 Codepad As The Main Codepad If you are not using a CP5 Master Partitioned CPS500P codepad as the main codepad of the partitioned system you will need to connect the Area 1 codepad to the main codepad terminals GND 12V CLK and DATA In addition to setting up the Area 1 codepad you will need to set the DIP switch 1 on the back of the codepad into the ON position and enable Option 1 in LOCATION 667 on page 154 Setting Up An Area 1 Codepad If you wish to have a separate area codepad only for Area 1 when using the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad as the main codepad you will need to connect the Area 1 codepad to the main codepad terminals GND 12V amp CLK with the DATA terminal to be connected to one of the programmable outputs programmed as 6 0 Area 1 Codepad Data DIP switch 1 on the back of the Area 1 codepad will need to be in the on position Setting Up An Area 2 Codepad If you wish to have a separate area codepad only for Area 2 when using the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad as the main codepad you will need to connect the Area 2 codepad to the main codepad terminals GND 12V amp CLK with the DATA terminal to be connected to one of the programmable outputs programmed as 6 1 Area 2 Codepad Data DIP switch 2 on the back of the Area 2 codepad will need to be in the on positi
55. and time needs to be set for the 1st January 1996 at 10 00 PM program the date and time as follows MASTER CODE el away 0 1 0 1 9 fe 2 2 o 0 away ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Option Bits This Section Includes The Following Dialler Options 1 Dialler Options 2 System Options 1 System Options 2 System Options 3 System Options 4 Consumer Options 1 Consumer Options 2 DTMF Command Module Options Expansion Board Type Telephone Line Fault Options Safecom Options System Options 5 System Options 6 Carrier Sync Options 150 Solution 16 Solutiaon 16 Safecom Installation Manual Option Bits When programming these locations you will notice that there are four options per location You may select one two three or all four of these options however only one number needs to be programmed This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together Program a seven 7 if you require options 1 2 and 4 simultaneously ie 1 2 4 7 Dialler Options 1 LOCATION 663 zl Description Enable Dialler Reporting Functions Enable Remote Arming Via The Telephone A Enable Upload Download Via Alarm Link Terminate Alarm Link Session On Alarm Table 99 Dialler Options 1 ij Enable Dialler Reporting Functions If this option has been enabled the dialler will function for all operations Upload Download
56. command module s terminal Pins for radio connection The connecting pins for The connecting pins for expander channel gt SOLUTION 16 expander channel output board SAFECOM EE output board Le JP5 E INT z 163 Z EXT RECEIVE D2 TRANSMIT Di BS Power supply select Data transmition LED Join 12v with INT for power It indicates the data from PCB or EXT for external receiving and transmitting 12v power Figure 23 Solution 16 Safecom Interface How to Install the BNC Fitting Se Female BNC Star SR Solution Box as ds S Rubber washer BNC Base ag e ERA Diagram showing correct installation of the female BNC Figure 24 BNC Installation Diagram Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 200 Solution 16 Solutiaon 16 Safecom Installation Manual How to Mount the Radio Solution PCB See BNC diagram for correct installation DQBOBODDDBAODDDAODDDGODAODODGOOOOES Note The Radio MUST be programmed before securing with double sided tape Use the double sided tape provided in the resistor pack to secure the radio to the side of the metal box Double sided tape Figure 25 Radio Mounting For SC8016 Mounting the Radio Before attempting to mount the radio in the metal cabinet the Radio must be programmed with the correct information
57. enable the expansion board fitted ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Status Information This Section Includes The Following e Bypass Codes For Zones 1 8 e Bypass Codes For Zones 9 16 e Trouble Codes For Zones 1 8 e Trouble Codes For Zones 9 16 e Codepad Duress e Codepad Panic e Access Denied e ACFail e Low Battery e Program Altered Code e Sensor Watch e Safecom RF Fail e Safecom Telco Fail e Safecom RF Jamming e Open Close Codes e Test Reports 114 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual System Status Information This section covers features that are involved with the basic house keeping of the system This includes monitoring of the zones whether they are isolated from the system or more importantly that they are actually operating the status of both the AC mains and DC power to the system and codepad generated alarms activated by the user Bypass Codes For Zones 1 8 LOCATION 468 469 2lsl Location Description Alarm Or Expansion Code In 4 2 Format 469 Restore Code In 4 2 Format Table 55 Zone Bypass Codes For Zones 1 8 A zone is bypassed when 1t is manually isolated A Zone Bypass report Contact ID Event Code 570 will be transmitted at the end of exit time for zones that have been manually isolated 24 hour zones cannot be manually isolated therefore they will never transmit bypass reports A Zone Bypass Restore report will be transmit
58. in increments of one second These will prove to be helpful when the control panel has been partitioned or in any installation that requires more than one entry timer Entry Timer 1 LOCATION 624 625 Defaulted To 10 Seconds 0 Location Description 1 Second Increments For Entry Timer 1 16 Second Increments For Entry Timer 1 Table 75 Entry Timer 1 Locations Entry Timer 2 LOCATION 626 627 Defaulted To 20 Seconds DR Location Description 1 Second Increments For Entry Timer 2 16 Second Increments For Entry Timer 2 Table 76 Entry Timer 2 Locations Entry Timer 3 LOCATION 628 629 Defaulted To 30 Seconds 14 Location Description 1 Second Increments For Entry Timer 3 16 Second Increments For Entry Timer 3 Table 77 Entry Timer 3 Locations Entry Timer 4 LOCATION 630 631 Defaulted To 40 Seconds als Location Description 630 1 Second Increments For Entry Timer 4 631 16 Second Increments For Entry Timer 4 Table 78 Entry Timer 4 Locations ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Event Timers 141 Exit Time The control panel has three separate exit timers Exit time can be programmed to be between 0 and 255 seconds in increments of one second The remote codepad will always give one beep at the end of exit time when arming in AWAY Mode or one short beep at the end of exit time when arming in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 Exit Timer For AWAY Mode LOCATION 6
59. in the AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 the output will reset To program the Pre Arming Alert Time refer to LOCATION 654 on page 144 Pre Arming Alert Time Software Version 1 20 Onwards This output will operate during the time period before the control panel will automatically arm in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 Once the control panel has automatically armed in the AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 the output will reset To program the Pre Arming Alert Time refer to LOCATION 654 on page 144 Exit Warning With All Zones Sealed Or Entry Warning This output will operate during exit time when the control panel has been armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode or STAY Mode 2 if all zones are sealed This output event type will reset once exit time has expired The next time this output event type will operate will be during entry time and will reset once entry time has expired or the system has been disarmed This output event type will also operate if a zone has triggered when the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 if the Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode has been programmed in LOCATION 638 639 on page 141 Exit Warning This output operates during exit time when the system has been armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 The output will reset once exit time has expired Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 128 o wee le El Lo El ls 3 v lo S No v v e lo El a v
60. indicator is flashing the system has detected a fault that has not yet been acknowledged If the indicator is illuminated the fault has been acknowledged and if the indicator is not illuminated the system has no system faults PARTIAL Indicator The partial indicator displays whether an area is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 ie If the PARTIAL indicator is illuminated an area is armed in either STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 and if the PARTIAL indicator is not illuminated no areas are armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 Whilst isolating zones the PARTIAL indicator flashes to indicate that you are in the isolate mode This PARTIAL indicator will flash in conjunction with the AUX indicator to indicate successful entry into any programming mode For example this will occur when entering the Installer s Programming Mode Operating Codepads In Partitioning Operating From A CP5 Area Addressable CP500A Codepad If you have a partitioned system with CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepads installed the operating procedure is exactly the same as described throughout this manual Refer to Hold Down Functions on page 61 to determine which area a particular codepad belongs Operating From A CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P Codepad If you have a partitioned system with a CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad installed the operating procedure is the same as described throughout this manual with one exception All operations are r
61. is determined by selecting only one of the time bases from Table 72 Time Base Settings on page 136 This means there are only four On times to choose from The Off time is calculated as a multiple of the On time by choosing a decimal number between 0 and 99 If an output is required to operate for 200 ms every five seconds program the time settings as follows DEE On Time Off Time ON Time OFF Time Increments Tolerance 200 ms 19 8 ms 200 ms 1 Sec 99 Sec s Min 99 Min s Hour 99 Hours Table 73 Pulsing Time Settings ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs 137 One Shot Polarities The duration or On time of an output is determined by the product of the time base and the multiplier If an output is required to operate for five seconds program the time settings as follows Time Base Multiplier The On time is calculated by multiplying the time base setting 1 second by the multiplier value 05 ie 5 x 1 5 seconds On Time Increments Tolerance 200 ms 19 8 Sec s 200 ms 1 Sec 99 Sec s 1 Min 99 Min s 1 Hour 99 Hours Table 74 One Shot Time Settings Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 138 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Event Timers This Section Includes The Following e How To Pr
62. one problem with this is that installations that report opening and closing reports will generally also transmit a test report each day This call is unnecessary as a successful opening and closing report means that the dialler is functioning correctly The Solutian 16 control panel allows you to save time and money by providing test reports only while the system is in the armed state Program LOCATION 506 513 on page 122 with Option 1 Send test reports only if the system is armed and then set the test report time to be in the middle of the day During Monday to Friday when the premises are generally open and the system disarmed a test report will not be transmitted However on the weekend the premises will be closed and the system armed so a test report will be transmitted at the programmed time thus verifying the operation of the dialler At first glance this may not seem to be a big deal but lets do a few sums and you will see just where savings can be made Let us assume that the customer wants needs or has test reports programmed for once a day as well as opening and closing reports This means that at least three phone calls will be made each week day and one call on Saturday and one call on Sunday By using the Soalutiam 16 control panel you will be able to eliminate five calls per week This means that over one week you will save your customer 1 20 and over one year you will save them 62 40 Not a bad saving and remember th
63. panel if any remote programming or operating commands are required to be carried out from a touch tone telephone Refer to LOCATION 671 on page 160 for more information on the available options that may be enabled Refer to Operating The Control Panel Using The DTMF Command Module on page 67 for more information on operational procedures Dialler Amplifier Lead CC807 This lead is required when using a telephone amplifier for listening to the data transmissions between the control panel and the base station receiver The standard inductive pick up that is supplied with the amplifier is not compatible with the Solution range of control panels This lead plugs into the amplifier unit and onto the AUXILIARY MODULE socket on the Solutian 16 control panel Alarm Link Software CC816 This software package is designed to be used for programming the Solutian 164 control panel by either the direct link or remote connect methods All options and features can be accessed via this software as well as maintaining history and service reports Refer to LOCATION 663 on page 150 for enabling this feature Direct Link Cable CC808 The Solutian 16 control panel has the ability to be programmed using the Alarm Link software without the need of a remote telephone line connection Using the direct link method one end of this cable plugs directly onto the AUXILIARY MODULE socket of the Salutian 16 control panel with the other end going to a serial com
64. per location You may select one two three or all of these alternatives for each location however only one number is required to be programmed This number is calculated by adding the option bit numbers together Example If at LOCATION 663 you want options 1 2 and 4 Add the numbers together and the total is the number to be programmed In this example the number to be programmed is 7 ie 1 2 4 7 Option Description Enable Dialler Reporting Functions Enable Remote Arming Via The Telephone Ns Enable Upload Download pg Terminate Alarm Link Session On Alarm Table 3 Example Programming Option Bits ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 23 Installers Programming Commands There are several commands that can be invoked to perform various functions once the Installer s Programming Mode has been entered To invoke the command enter the corresponding numerical code followed by the AWAY button Command Function 958 959 960 Exit Installer Programming Mode 961 963 964 Erase Programming Key O ooo 9685 966 Enable and Disable Automatic Stepping Of Locations During Programming This Command Displays The Control Panel s Software Version Number Only When Using The Hand Held Programmer Table 4 Installer s Programming Commands Command 958 Enable Disable Zone Status Mode This function enables and disables the zone status display mode When using the hand
65. ran ran nnno 192 Solution 16 Wining DA Ta at 194 Eight Zone Expansion Board CC885 Fixed 3K3 EOL Reststorg nono nonn nc nrnn nro nro nnnnnnnnno 195 Eight Zone Expansion Board CC883 Variable EOL Resistors ccccsceesseeseesceeeceesceeseeeseeeseeeneceneceeeceeeeeenseeneenaees 195 Connections Of Split EOL Resistors For 16 Zone Operation cccccccescescesceeseeeseeseeeeeeseceseceeeeaeceaeceseceeeseeseeeneensees 196 Eight Channel Open Collector Output Board CCH8A nono nnnnnrnnrrnn rro n ron n non nnnn rra rrnnnrnnnnnno 196 Connection For Momentary Or Latching Keyswitch oooocooccncnoccnocnoonconnconoconononconncnnn con nnnnnnnnrnnr cnn nr nn non ron nr nn rrnn rra n nano 197 Connections For 25 Pin Logging Drmter nn nr non r non rnnnrnn rn rra n ran naar ron n ran rrnnrran ran 197 Connections For 9 Pin Eogging Pri tadas 197 Solutioni T6 Component Overlay rnnr n die 198 Solution 16 Safecom Interface ii ia rE EE EAEE EE E E E TREE Ra 199 IOEZTGCKKDKIOITITG LEKT E CIE 199 How to Install the BNG Fitting ad EE 199 How to Mount the Radio ue iii 200 Mopp Hecker ie ee E EE EE EE 200 Telecom Connection Dir 201 APPENDIX Ai 204 Te lephone Anti JaMMing da 204 APPENDIX E 205 Test Reports Only When Armed 0 cccececeeesseeseeeseeseceseeeseesecscecseecseeeseeesecesecesecacesseceaeeeaeceaeceseceeeseeeeeeeceeeseenaeenneees 205 WARRANTY STATEMENT AAA 208 Specifications sei EE 208 Software Version Numbers 3 ici c8s A eee GAS Ra
66. require to use the Alarm Link Software CC816 to remotely program the control panel The control panel will not respond to the Alarm Link Software 1f this option has not been enabled For direct Upload Download operations via the Direct Link Cable CC808 this option does not need to be set Whether the dialler reporting functions Option 1 of this location are enabled or disabled this will have no effect on Upload Download operations 8 Terminate Alarm Link Session On Alarm If the control panel is communicating with a remote computer via Alarm Link Software CC816 and an alarm has registered the Alarm Link session will be terminated and the relevant alarm message will be transmitted to the base station receiver If an alarm occurs that does not need to report to the base station receiver the session will not be terminated If this option is not enabled and an alarm has registered the Alarm Link software will prompt the operator with a Terminate or Continue message ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Option Bits 151 Dialler Options 2 LOCATION 664 le Description Send Open Close Reports Only If A Previous Alarm Has Occurred Enable First To Open Last To Close Reporting When Partitioned Send Open Close Reports When Armed In STAY Mode 1 amp 2 Enable Answering Machine Bypass Only When System Is Armed New Software Version 1 31 Onwards Table 100 Dialler Options 2 Send Open
67. socket on the control panel Please ensure that all power to the control panel has been removed before connecting the voice module Remember to align the arrows on the voice module to those on the control panel Reconnect the power to the control panel once the voice module has been connected correctly EARPIECE STATUS INDICATOR SOCKET O RECORD REPLAY d SWITCH Ex lt MICROPHONE ALIGNMENT ARROWS Figure 2 Diagram Of EDM Voice Module CC888 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 84 Solution 14 Solutidon 14 Safecom Installation Manual Basic Pager Format Reporting Basic Pager Format requires some interpretation of the numbers that appear on the display however 1t is possible to differentiate between 1000 different control panels when a number of control panels are reporting to the one pager To use this feature you will require to program the following software options 1 LOCATION 000 015 requires the Basic Pager s access telephone number programmed 2 LOCATION 049 requires Option 5 Pager Handshake to be programmed 3 LOCATION 050 requires Option 12 Basic Pager Reporting to be programmed Subscriber ID Zone Status System Status Number 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 78 01200000 9000 Zone Normal O Alarm 1 Zone Bypassed 2 Zone Trouble 3 Disarmed 8 Armed 9 Normal O Panic Duress 1 Fire Alarm 2 Medical Alarm 3 AC Normal 0 AC Failure 1
68. soseri oa non amenace 87 Converting To Hexadecma 88 Audible Indicators 0 0 ceceeeeeeeseeteeeeenereeeneeeeeeeeeeee 33 Auto Eng ee EENS See 144 Auto Arming Pre Alert Tmer 144 Auto Operation Of The Timed Output 145 Auto Operation Pre Alert Timer eeeeeeeeeeeeeee 145 Automatic Stepping Of Locations 28 AUX Indicator cite einen ie SV 171 Display When Telephone Line In Use 0 s0ses0 158 Auxiliary Code 1 101 Auxiliary Code Draconis deg S ier 101 Auxiliary Codes cccccesceescesseesseeseeeseeeeesseeseeenees 52 101 Output Event TYp6 ccooccnnoccnoncconocononcnonananancconnnanonoss 131 AWAY Indicator oooooccnnocccononcccnnonnnnononnnccnonananonnnnnss 32 34 AWAY Mode Automatic Am EE IER Enable Single Button Arming concononicnocnnnnnnconnnnnns 159 Latching Input 161 163 Momentary Input 161 162 ISSUE210 DOC Solution 16 Solution 16 Safecom Installation Manual B Base Station Information Dialling Format 93 Handshake TONE iii tt 94 Primary Telephone Number 92 Programming Telephone Number 92 Secondary Telephone Number 93 Subscriber ID Number 96 Transmission Fommat 94 Transmission Speed 95 Basic Pago e Miele eee Deletes 84 Battery Test Only On Armin Ss ica 166 Bell Testi ti ta 62 Busy Tone Detection For Domestic Dialling 166 Bypass Report atinada 114 C Call Back Telephone Number 93 Carrier Sync Options ooooocnoccoccnononononnnonnncnnncononnncnnncnnos 167 Cellular Dialler cb 186
69. such as transmit and receive frequencies transmit power and bandwidth If you are unable to program this information then please contact your nearest Detection Systems office for assistance Once programmed proceed with mounting the Radio in the metal cabinet by placing the double sided tape on the base of the Maxon Radio as in Figure 25 Then connect the coax cable to the metal cabinet as in figure 24 then attach the male BNC to the Maxon Radio Finally connect the wiring harness to the Radio and the SAFECOM Solutian 16 interface ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Terminal Definitions and Descriptions Telecom Connection Diagrams 201 TELECOM CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR AUSTRALIA TOP VIEW Control EE Panel GREEN l YELLOW 4P4C PLUG 1 Green Internal Phone Line 5 Yellow Internal Phone Line 2 Black Telecom Line Street 6 Red Telecom Line Street 605 PLUG 611 SOCKET Internal Phones NIC BLACK GREEN 3 Not Connected 4 Not Connected Telecom Line TELECOM CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR AUSTRALIA TOP VIEW camal EL anel BLACK l GREEN 6P4C PLUG 1 Green Internal Phone Line 5 Yellow Internal Phone Line TELECOM CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR NEW ZEALAND 2 Black Telecom Line Street 6 Red Telecom Line Street 605 PLUG RED YELLOW 611 SOCKET Internal Phones O
70. system until it has closed Opening the window after exit time has expired will cause an alarm condition Forced Arming The feature of arming the system when a zone is not sealed is known as forced arming To enable forced arming Option 1 in LOCATION 665 on page 152 will need to be enabled If the AWAY indicator does not illuminate and a long beep is heard forced arming is not permitted If this is the case you must ensure that all zones are sealed or manually isolated before you can arm the system Disarming The System From AWAY Mode How To Disarm The System From AWAY Mode 1 Enter your cope followed by the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard and the AWAY indicator will extinguish A flashing ZONE indicator represents a previous alarm on that zone cope away Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 36 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Arming The System In STAY Mode 1 STAY Mode 1 is when the system has been armed with particular zones automatically isolated These zones must be programmed by the installer When there is a need to arm only the system perimeter this mode is extremely handy It automatically disables the interior detection zones for allowing movement within the protected area while at the same time arming the perimeter zones There are two methods for arming your system in STAY Mode 1 Method one is standard and will always operate Method two 1s opti
71. the base station is running Sims 1 software and you want to send individual open and close reports for each area you will need to allocate a separate Subscriber ID Number for each area Sims 2 software will accept multiple open and close reports on the same Subscriber ID Number 7 Does each area need its own different entry delay time 8 Does each area need its own individual codepad 9 Does each area need its own individual siren and strobe 10 What areas are each user allowed access to ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Partitioning 173 Open Close Reports The following options are related to Open Close reports You can select one two or all three options to suit your application Dialler Options 2 LOCATION 664 0 le Description Send Open Close Reports Only If A Previous Alarm Has Occurred Enable First To Open Last To Close Reporting When Partitioned Send Open Close Reports When Armed In STAY Mode 1 amp 2 Enable Answering Machine Bypass Only When System Is Armed New Software Version 1 31 Onwards Table 117 Dialler Options 2 Send Open Close Report Only If A Previous Alarm Has Occurred This option requires Open Close Reports in LOCATION 504 505 programmed on page 120 for it to be effective An open report will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the system has been disarmed after an alarm has occurred When the system has been armed a closing report wi
72. this installation manual to all levels of readers As the Solution control panels have continued to advance over the years they have become very powerful and extensive Some of its early first time users have advanced to true power users and we need to address their needs too while maintaining the simplicity of the manual and the product ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Introduction 15 Quick Start The following steps will enable you to use the Solutian 16 control panel with the factory default values 1 Connect the AC plug pack to the control panel All zone indicators on the remote codepad will illuminate momentarily and then extinguish Check the operation of the overload LED LD1 on the printed circuit board In normal operation the LED will not illuminate The MAINS indicator will remain on as will the AWAY indicator The system is now in the armed state The lead acid back up battery should now be connected The lead acid rechargeable back up battery should be rated at 12v DC 6 5 Ah Enter the master cope followed by the away button to disarm the system The AWAY indicator will extinguish The control panel is now in the disarmed state Programming of the control panel can now be accessed Refer to the Master Code Functions on page 50 for more information The factory default Master Code is LIe Enter the factory default INSTALLER cone followed by the away button to acce
73. when the dialler has made all possible attempts to reach the base station receiver It will reset when the first Kiss Off is recetved This output event type is not applicable to domestic or voice reporting To redirect the above output event type to operate a codepad buzzer program the output event type as below Lygi Communications Failure This event will operate when the dialler has made all possible attempts to reach the base station receiver It will reset when the first Kiss Off is received This output event type is not applicable to domestic or voice reporting The codepad buzzer will now operate instead of the output that has been programmed The output is no longer functional and cannot be used for any other output event type Note If you have used all programmable outputs on the control panel and require an additional output program the output event type on any output between 7 14 and redirect the output to the remote codepad buzzer This enables you and your customer to save money on purchasing the additional 8 Channel Output Expansion Board CC884 Safecom Remote Operation Of Outputs Safecom can remotely operate up to 3 outputs on the Solution SC8016 as well as Arm and Disarm from the ST1000 software in the Control Room The Solution SC8016 needs to be programmed for this function to work Outputs that are to be operated via ST1000 software need to be programmed with the event codes 2 2 Remote control 2 za Remote co
74. whether day alarm has been turned On or Off When day alarm has been turned On the STAY indicator will flash every three seconds Refer to LOCATION 669 on page 158 to enable this option Monitoring of zones 9 16 can be achieved by programming an output to mimic a zone Refer to Output Event Types on page 127 for further information Day Alarm In Partitioning Day alarm operates independently for each area when the system has been partitioned Any area can turn day alarm On or Off without effecting another area Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 112 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual EOL Resistor Value LOCATION 339 Al 12K Brown Red Orange 22K Red Red Orange 1K5 Brown Green Red SEH e SE 15 3K9 Orange White Red 457 Yellow Violet Red 7 5K6 Green Blue Red 3K3 6K8 Split EOL For 16 Zones 8 6K8 Blue Grey Black Brown 1 ee Table 54 EOL Resistor Values The control panel has the ability to be programmed for different values of EOL resistors This feature is only applicable to zones one through to eight This is a global parameter and will effect all eight zones simultaneously It gives the ability to fit the Solutiam 16 control panel into an existing installation without having to change the EOL resistors This feature also increases the security of the system as there are eleven possible EOL resistor values that can be
75. will reset when the away button has been pressed If the control panel has been partitioned pressing the AWAY button on a CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad other than that the zone was allocated or pressing the AWAY button on a CP5 Master Partitioned Codepad CP500P codepad will not reset the output You can only reset this output on the area codepad that the zone has been allocated to when the system has been partitioned Day Alarm Enabled Software Version 1 20 Onwards This output will operate as soon as day alarm has been enabled The output will reset when day alarm has been turned off Refer to Hold Down Functions on page 61 for further information day alarm Timed Output This output will operate when the time set in LOCATION 656 659 on page 145 has been reached This output can also be activated using the following methods 1 Remote Codepad Refer to Turning Outputs On and Off on page 57 for more information 2 Via Touch Tone Telephone Refer to Operating The Control Panel Using The DTMF Command Module on page 67 and Turning Outputs On and Off on page 57 for more information 3 Via Alarm Link Software CC816 Refer to the Alarm Link Instruction Manual for more information Pre Alert Warning For Timed Output This output will operate for the duration of the pre alert time set in LOCATION 655 on page 145 AC Fail This output will operate as soon as the AC mains has failed It will reset as soon
76. work in some instances where the caller is not a genuine burglar and is not deliberately trying to jam the control panel With this simple method of hanging up for ninety seconds we have not only delayed the alarm signal for this time but also the time taken for the original failed call attempts which could easily total 4 minutes This is bad enough in its own right but even more disturbing is the fact that the initial failed call attempts allow for the establishment of an audio connection between the would be burglar and the control panel Anyone with a little knowledge of alarm systems will be able to actually trick the dialler into thinking it is talking to a base station thus actually clearing the alarm signal Pretty frightening when you thought the control panel you were using and recommending to your customers is supposed to have anti jamming At Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited we take anti jamming very seriously and have in fact devoted a great deal of time and money researching this problem Our engineers have come up with the best possible anti jamming procedure known and patented accordingly Patent Number 571994 Our procedure is very simple and effective because we never answer the burglars phone call and the Telecom Network will automatically clear an unanswered call in approximately ninety seconds This time will be even shorter if the call is originated through the Mobile Net Network where it will most likely be in the case
77. 22 Programming The Control Panel Once A Communication Link Has Been Established AA 22 PROGRAMMING OPTION BUS Address ceuedadecsatectetetapyedtvaotandesoxeg A asia 22 INSTALLERS PROGRAMMING COMMANDS urene eaa aee r S nono E E 23 Command 958 Enable Disable Zone Status Mode 23 Command 959 Test Programming Kevin ina 24 Command 960 Exit Installer s Programming Mode 24 Command 961 Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default Seng 24 Command 962 Copy Control Panel Memory To Programming Key 25 Command 963 Copy From Programming Key To Control Panel 25 Command 964 Erase Programming Key 26 Command 965 Set Up Domestic Dialling Format cccecceesceeseesseeseeeseeeseeeseceeeeseeeseenaecnsesaeeeaeenseenaeceseesseeneeeneeeaes 27 Command 966 Enable Disable Automatic Stepping Of Locations ooooccnocnocnconncononononononononnnonnnconnnnn nn nn rnnnnnrnnnnnnnrnnos 28 Command 999 Display Software Version Number 28 Disable Factory Deal lanos re A AO oa e o ab tactics eae 29 DEFAULTING THE CONTROL PANEL sccccsccsseviscetcssabciicucdncteavascecncvecnensebseadutdncenssagndvrsvagedecdecedvcncudenchagnseacuavsrtvectensebseddes 29 SYSTEM INDICATORS AND OPERATIONS cccsssssssccsssssssccsssssscccsssssscsssssssssscsssscssssssssessses Al SYSTEM INDICATORS AND OPERATIONS non ennannonon nan nana nonannnn nana nen nen nonnnncnnannns 32 The Codepadi a E A A A a ae a N aE 32 ZONE TOCAMOS A A igen AA it 32 AWAY EE LEE 32 STAY Gi Caton ti AA
78. 2V GND 212 211 Z10 Z9 12V JP2 VARIABLE ZONE SOLUTION 16 EXPANDER Power Detector E RP1 PGM NETWORK JP1 Figure 15 Eight Zone Expansion Board CC883 Variable EOL Resistor Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 196 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual Connections Of Split EOL Resistors For 16 Zone Operation EOL EOL EOL EOL Standard Eight Zone 3K3 Configuration N C 3K3 EOL 16 Zone 3K3 6K8 Zone 1 Configuration N C If N O Switches Are Used Both 6K8 EOL Zones Will Trip If Either Of The Zone 9 N O Switches Are Closed N C Figure 16 Connections Of Split EOL Resistors For 16 Zone Operation Eight Channel Open Collector Output Board CC884 12V OP8 JP2 OP7 OP6 OP3 OP2 OP1 JP1 12V LOAD Se cies ESAS 12V Eight 2050 Programmable E HO GND Outputs Oo 25 Figure 17 Eight Channel Open Collector Output Board CC884 Maximum current is 400 ma per Output Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Terminal Definitions and Descriptions 197 Connection For Momentary Or Latching Keyswitch Momentary or Latching Keyswitch Figure 18 Connection For Momentary Or Latching Keyswitch Connections For 25 Pin Logging Printer JAEN O 1 O 14 O 2 es d To Solution 16 O 16 Termina
79. 3 AMP 1 AMP Sy REMOVE LINK FOR DRY CONTACT Termination For Phone Line Socket For lt Telecom Lead Connection 216 215 214 213 Zone Termination Strip 212 zH 210 Z9 Output Termination Strip lt Battery Input lt Plug Pack Input EDM TF008 Figure 21 Solution 16 Component Layout With Safecom Interface Line Fault Module NOTE POLARITY DTMF Command Module NOTE POLARITY Voice Module or Modem Module or Phone Amplifier NOTE POLARITY Battery Consumption LED When Programming Key or 3 Amp Battery Fuse 1 Amp Accessory Fuse For External Equipment LD4 DEFAULT 2 SWITCH I DEFAULI Termination For Phone Line 2 Socket For 4 lt Telecom Lead 5 Connection aaa yeh eee SE A GE Zp 216 S 27 218 ze z14 BR OPTIONAL 8 ZONE 25 1213 E EXPANDER 8 CHANNEL GND Strip OUTPUT BOARD PLUGS AM IN HERE 7a 242 Z3 Zt z2 210 Z1 29 RELAY CONTACT KS COMM n GND a com Ulm COM D d e Ni 33 Output T uo Termination D Strip E 0 D ira D a lt Battery Input lt Plug Pack Input EDM TF008 Solution 16 Component Layout Figure 22 d imite Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty L ISSUE210 DOC Terminal Definitions and Descriptions 199 Solution 16 Safecom Interface Connect to
80. 32 633 Defaulted To 60 Seconds 12 J s Location Description 16 Second Increments For Exit Timer For AWAY Mode 1 Second Increments For Exit Timer For AWAY Mode Table 79 Exit Timer For AWAY Mode Locations Exit Timer For STAY Mode 1 LOCATION 634 635 Defaulted To 60 Seconds 23 Location Description 1 Second Increments For Exit Timer For STAY Mode 1 16 Second Increments For Exit Timer For STAY Mode 1 Table 80 Exit Timer For STAY Mode 1 Locations Exit Timer For STAY Mode 2 LOCATION 636 637 Defaulted To 60 Seconds 12 J s Location Description 1 Second Increments For Exit Timer For STAY Mode 2 16 Second Increments For Exit Timer For STAY Mode 2 Table 81 Exit Timer For STAY Mode 2 Locations Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode LOCATION 638 639 Defaulted To 60 Seconds ls Location Description 1 Second Increments For Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode 16 Second Increments For Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode Table 82 Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode Locations Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode is the delay time used for ALL ZONES except 24 hour burglary and 24 hour fire zones when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 Each zone including delay zones will have the entry delay as programmed in LOCATION 638 639 ie The delay time programmed for a delay zone will be overridden by the entry guard timer If the entry guard timer has been programmed as 0 each zone will act as per its p
81. 4 625 Entry Timer 1 Location 626 627 Entry Timer 2 Location 628 629 Entry Timer 3 Location 630 631 Entry Timer 4 Location 632 633 Exit Time For AWAY Mode Location 634 635 Exit Time For STAY Mode 1 Location 636 637 Exit Time For STAY Mode 2 Location 638 639 Entry Guard Time For STAY Mode Location 640 641 Codepad Lockout Time Location 642 643 Sensor Watch Time Location 624 Location 625 Location 626 Location 627 Location 628 Location 629 Location 630 Location 631 Location 632 Location 633 Location 634 Location 635 Location 636 Location 637 Location 638 Location 639 Location 640 Location 641 Location 642 Location 643 Location 644 649 Software Version 1 10 Only System Date Location 644 Location 645 Location 646 Location 647 Location 648 Location 649 Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Se
82. 47 Siteni Dialer iii sti a 146 Synthesised Voice Disable Via Master Code 81 Synthesised Voice Reporting ACKNOW Ed G6 2 2c c scsesecesdesscessasssenesitageeesssscscenevaces 81 EU EE 81 Set Up and Programming Numberg 80 System Operations Arming In AWAY Mode coooooonocnoconocnconcnonononccnnonnnonnos 35 Arming In STAY Mode 1 36 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 225 Arming In STAY Mode 7 38 BIG te TEE 35 Disarming From STAY Mode 1 37 Disarming From STAY Mode 2 39 System Options 1 152 System Options Ziene iein eoe 153 System Options 3 ii a 154 System Options A 155 156 System Options 3 165 System Options 8 166 System Status Reports AC Fail ccsccscscccesscadesevatessses a E R 118 Access Denied sinsice a ai 118 Duress Alar ii aan eens 116 Low Battery iinet cirio deis is Seg reg iio 119 Open Close Reports 120 Panic A lari Aessen idas 117 Programming Change 119 RESP AIL iii dad 121 RE Jamming evi aiii 121 Sensor Watch 120 Telco IEN 121 RRE 122 Zone Bypass Report 114 Zone Trouble cocinada deidad 115 T NA A Ee ce 121 Telecom Connection Diagrams ooooocnncnoonconcconcnanonnnons 201 Telepermit Note rancia 16 Telephone Anti Jamiming ooooocnnocnnononononnncnnncanonnncnnnons 204 Telephone Line Fa 43 Activate Alarm When Armed coooocnnnccionnconconnconcnnnos 164 Activate Alarm When Disarmed cceecees 164 Operate FAULT Indicator oooooooconncnoccnonocononnncnnnon
83. 5 seconds and then reapplied If a third trigger is detected within 3 minutes of the first trigger ie 3 pulses in 3 minutes a fire alarm will be registered Power to the smoke detector will be maintained to facilitate unit identification via the detector memory This output should be connected to the negative side of any fire smoke detector To configure an output for this feature use the following settings EVENT TYPE 2 7 POLARITY 10 TIMEBASE 2 MULTIPLIER 15 The zone that the fire smoke detector is connected to should be programmed as follows ZONE TYPE 13 OPTION 0 ZONE PULSE COUNT 3 ZONE TIME 15 ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs 131 a 2163 e E a Remote Control 1 2 9 Remote Control 2 Remote Control 3 2 611 Remote Control 4 These outputs can be remotely activated Turned On or Off via the following methods 1 Remote Codepad Refer to Turning Outputs On and Off on page 57 for further information 2 Remotely Via Touch Tone Phone Refer to Operating The Control Panel Using The DTMF Command Module on page 67 and Turning Outputs On and Off on page 57 for further information 3 Remotely Via Alarm Link Software Refer to your Alarm Link Instruction Manual for further information 4 Remotely Via Safecom Radio Link Refer to Safecom Remote Operation Of Outputs on page 126 for further information Auxiliary
84. 6 will alternate the dialling sequence between DTMF and Decadic if the call to the base station receiver was unsuccessful Caution should be exercised when selecting the dialling method Only use the Australian method if the control panel is to be connected to the Australian Telecommunications Network The International DTMF dialling option should only be used in those countries that allow both the caller and the receiver to terminate the phone call Using the incorrect format will disable EDM s patent Telephone Anti Jamming feature Option Dialling Format Option Dialling Format Australian DTMF Touch Tone Set International DTMF Touch Tone Australian Decadic Reversed Decadic 10 Minus 1 3 Alternating DTMF amp Australian Decadic 6 Alternating DTMF amp Reversed Decadic Table 43 Dialling Formats Note The alternating sequence is as follows DTMF Decadic DTMF Decadic DTMF Decadic Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 94 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Handshake Tone LOCATION 049 H This location sets the type of handshake tone required before data transmissions to the monitoring station will begin 1 Hi Lo Handshake Tone is required when the control panel requires to communicate in Contact ID Format or High Speed DTMF 2 1400 Hz Handshake Tone is required when the control panel requires to communicate in Ademco Lo Speed Format Domestic Dialling Format or Synth
85. 683 Subscriber ID Number For Area 2 poaa Location 684 687 Page 175 Subscriber ID Number For Area 3 olofo o Tocation 688 BI Page 175 Subscriber ID Number For Area 4 ofojo o ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming Sheets 217 Location 692 699 Page 176 Zone Allocations For Area 1 polofofofo o oo Loco A EE EE Page 176 Zone Allocations For Area 2 lofolo o o o olo E IO ad Oe oo Page 177 Zone Allocations For Area 3 polofofofo o oo Location 7162723 eT Page 177 Zone Allocations For Area 4 lofoJo o o o olo MA A Page 178 User Code Allocations Location 726 Areas For User 43 Location 727 Areas For User 4 Location 724 Areas For User 1 Location 725 Areas For User 42 Location 728 Areas For User 5 Location 732 Areas For User 9 Location 736 Areas For User 1 210 Location 740 Areas For User 17 o Location 744 Areas For User 21 o Location 748 Areas For User 25 Location 752 Areas For User 29 0 Location 729 Areas For User 6 Location 733 Areas For User 10 Location 737 Areas For User 14 H Location 741 Areas For User 1 sjo Location 745 Areas For User wel Location 749 Areas For User 26 Location 753 Areas For User wll Location 730 Areas For User 7 H Location 734 Areas For User 11 Location 738 Areas For User 415 H Location 742 Areas For User 1 d Location 746 Areas For User 23 0 Locati
86. 8 12V 12V GND These relay contacts are fully programmable as with Outputs 1 2 and 3 They are factory defaulted as an alarm output Sirens Running Event Type 1 15 The N O contact is the connection point for the positive side of a DC siren such as a piezo screamer The negative side of the DC siren needs to be connected to the GND terminal A link JP7 is provided on the PCB for connecting the COM terminal to either GND or 12V This link should be connected to 12V as shown in Figure 13 Solution 16 Wiring Diagram on page 194 The relay is rated at 1 Amp 30 VDC These two terminals are provided to power detectors and other equipment They are fuse protected by the 1 amp fuse These terminals are zones one to four and their common terminal is 12V All normally closed contacts are to be connected in series with the EOL resistor where all normally open contacts are to be connected in parallel with the EOL resistor The function of the zones and their response times are programmable via the system programming options These two terminals are provided to power detectors and other equipment They are fuse protected by the 1 amp fuse These terminals are zones five to eight and their common terminal is 12V All normally closed contacts are to be connected in series with the EOL resistor where all normally open contacts are to be connected in parallel with the EOL resistor The function of the zones and their response times are programma
87. AWAY Mode Ifthe control panel has been partitioned ALL areas will arm in AWAY Mode 4 Hang up the telephone and the system will remain armed If you hear a number of strange sounding tones when the control panel answers the incoming call this means that the system has been programmed for remote programming functions Simply wait for a pause in the tones and follow the steps above to remotely arm the system If the control panel does not answer the call this means that the system may already be armed or remote functions have not been enabled Refer to LOCATION 663 on page 150 to enable remote arming via the telephone Note Where both remote arming and Upload Download have been selected the control panel will answer the call expecting the remote computer This is easily noticed as the modem negotiating tones will be heard rather than the remote arming jingle ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Remote Operations 67 Operating The Control Panel Using The DTMF Command Module The DTMF Command Module CC886 will allow you to operate the control panel remotely via the telephone line Once a communications link has been established with the control panel you can perform any system functions as you would using the codepad on a touch tone telephone Master Code Functions User Code Functions Installer Code Functions and the ability to enter Installer s Programming Mode to remotely program the control panel are avail
88. AY Mode 1 will report as user code number 32 How To Disarm The System From STAY Mode 1 1 Hold down the stay button until two beeps are heard The STAY indicator will extinguish and the system will be disarmed STAY Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 38 Solution 14 Solutidon 14 Safecom Installation Manual Arming The System In STAY Mode 2 STAY Mode 2 is when the system has been armed with particular zones automatically isolated These zones are programmed via the Master Code holder When there is a need to arm the system perimeter only this mode is extremely handy It automatically disables the interior detection zones allowing for movement within the protected area while at the same time arming the perimeter zones For STAY Mode 2 to operate Option 2 in LOCATION 670 on page 159 will need to be enabled Refer to the Master Code Function Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones on page 59 for further information on programming zones for STAY Mode 2 Note Single button arming in STAY Mode 2 will report as user code number 32 How To Arm The System In STAY Mode 2 1 Hold down the oJ button until two beeps are heard The STAY indicator will illuminate and exit time for STAY Mode 2 will now commence Any zone that has been programmed for STAY Mode 2 will be automatically isolated and their respective indicators will begin to flash until exit time expires At the end of exit time the ZONE indicator
89. Close Report Only If A Previous Alarm Has Occurred This option requires Open Close Reports in LOCATION 504 505 enabled on page 120 for it to be effective An opening report will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the system has been disarmed after an alarm has occurred When the system has been armed a closing report will be transmitted This feature can also be used in conjunction with the Patrolman Code Refer to Patrolman Code on page 99 for more information If the system has been partitioned an Open Close report will only be transmitted on the area that the alarm had occurred Note If the system is disarmed when an alarm occurs only a closing report will be transmitted when the system is next armed 2 Enable First To Open Last To Close Reporting When Partitioned This option needs to be enabled if only one Open Close report is required when the system has been partitioned Rather than having individual Open Close reports for each area a closing report will be transmitted only when ALL areas have been armed and an opening report will be transmitted as soon as one area has been disarmed The reports will be transmitted on the Subscriber ID Number allocated to that particular area Subscriber ID Numbers and Open Close reports must be programmed for all areas 4 Send Open Close Reports When In STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 If open and close reports are required when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 t
90. Code 1 This output will operate when Auxiliary Code 1 has been entered The output will reset when Auxiliary Code 1 has been entered again The output can be activated via the remote codepad the Alarm Link Software CC816 or a touch tone telephone if a DTMF Command Module CC886 has been enabled and connected to the control panel Auxiliary Code 2 This output will operate when Auxiliary Code 2 has been entered The output will reset when Auxiliary Code 2 has been entered again The output can be activated via the remote codepad the Alarm Link Software CC816 or a touch tone telephone if a DTMF Command Module CC886 has been enabled and connected to the control panel Telephone Line Fault This output will operate when the Solution Line Fault Module CC887 detects that the telephone line has been disconnected for more than 40 seconds The output will reset once the telephone line has been restored continuously for more than 40 seconds This output will not operate unless the Solution Line Fault Module CC887 has been enabled in LOCATION 673 on page 164 Communications Failure After 3 Unsuccessful Calls This output will operate when the communication dialler has made 3 unsuccessful calls to the base station receiver The output will reset when all messages have been transmitted ie When the buffer is empty or when all possible attempts have been made Communications Failure This event will operate when the communication dialler has mad
91. Code 2 Location 072 079 eib E eebe E User Code 3 Location 080 087 User Code 4 Location 088 095 User Code 5 Location 096 103 seepe o deklgdchld A eee NO User Code 6 Location 104 111 User Code 7 Location 112 119 User Code 8 Location 120 127 speeed Il eee fo e e User Code 9 Location 128 135 User Code 10 Location 136 143 User Code 11 Location 144 151 sepe oO eee fo e NO User Code 12 Location 152 159 User Code 13 Location 160 167 User Code 14 Location 168 175 spie E eee kl ee Le User Code 15 Location 176 183 User Code 16 Location 184 191 User Code 17 Location 192 199 spiet A ee NO e e User Code 18 Location 200 207 User Code 19 Location 208 215 User Code 20 Location 216 223 speet o eee NO ee jd User Code 21 Location 224 231 User Code 22 Location 232 User Code 23 Location 240 247 hit ISSUE210 DOC 239 palassets 0 plessis o Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming Sheets 211 User Code 24 Location 248 255 User Code 25 Location 256 263 User Code 26 Location 264 271 R R R User Code 27 Location 272 279 User Code 28 Location 280 287 User Code 29 Location 288 295 e R R User Code 30 Location 296 303 User Code 31 Location 304 311 User Code 32 Location 312 319 EEE o BEER Wl PEE EEL DH Location S202 327r BEE ee ee ae vee Vee O AD AD Page 101 Location 279 298 Page 101 Location 336 337 Page 110 1 Zone 1 1 Zone 5 Day Alarm Mask Location 336 2 Zo
92. Command 9 75 70 followed by the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish 4 To program your telephone numbers enter the master cone followed by D and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Refer to Master Code Functions on page 50 for more information If there are telephone numbers already programmed they will be displayed one digit at a time via the ZONE indicators on the codepad If there are no previous programmed telephone numbers a further two beeps will be heard after entering this mode These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the last telephone number has been displayed 5 Enter all the digits for PHONENo 1 one digit at a time You will notice as each digit is entered the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate 6 After you have entered all the digits of the first telephone number press the stay button if there is more than one phone number This will insert a break between the first telephone number and the second telephone number If there is only one phone number press the AWAY button to exit this mode Te Enter all the digits for PHONE No 2 one digit at a time You will notice as each digit is entered the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate 8 After the last digit of the second telephone number press the away button to exit this mode unless a third telephone nu
93. ER 1 34 that you wish to alter followed by the away button Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding ZONE indicator will illuminate Refer to Table 19 Zone Indicators Showing Relative User Numbers on page 53 Enter the digits required for the new cone followed by the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish If you wish to change any further user codes repeat this procedure as many times as required MASTER CODE SIE AWAY USER NUMBER AWAY NEW CODE AWAY When adding or changing user codes this function will automatically terminate if a button is not pressed within sixty seconds Pressing the away button will also terminate the session at anytime One long beep indicates the code entered already exists an incorrect user number was selected or the area allocation of the user code is incorrect if the system has been partitioned Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 52 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual How To Delete A User Code Software Version 1 10 Only 1 Enter your master cope followed by D and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Enter the USER NUMBER 1 34 that you wish to delete followed by the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding ZONE indicator will illuminate Refer to Tab
94. LIe followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the programming key connected to the hand held programmer has now be tested 5 Enter command 2lelal followed by the button to exit the Installer s Programming Mode 6 Leave the switch on the hand held programmer in the EXT position and disconnect the external programming key Command 960 Exit Installer s Programming Mode This command is used to exit the Installer s Programming Mode after you complete your programming alterations This is achieved by entering command efe followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the system will return to normal This command can be performed at any programming stage and from any location Command 961 Reset Control Panel Back To Factory Default Settings This command will reset the control panel back to the factory default values Refer to the values shown throughout this manual or the Programming Sheets on page 209 This is achieved by entering the command Jesu followed by the D button Three beeps will be heard ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 25 Command 962 Copy Control Panel Memory To Programming Key This command is used to copy the control panel memory to the programming key How To Copy The Control Panel Memory To The Programming Key 1 2 3 4 5 Enter Installer s Programming Mode Plug the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on th
95. O ON OFF R K HOME aN COM Solution EDM Radio Key Keyswitch Control Panel Interface CC813 NOTE R K BEEPS MUST BE ENABLED IF REQUIRED LOCATION 665 MUST CONTAIN 8 Keyswitch On Off Keyswitch r O O 1 I I O O Keyswitch Solution EDM Radio Key Keyswitch NOTE 1 Momentary Contact Control Panel Interface CC813 ee must NOTE 2 Panic Switch must be momentary contact NOTE ENABLE KEYSWITCH INTERFACE MODULE LOCATION 666 MUST CONTAIN 1 Figure 11 Radio Key Keyswitch Interface CC813 Connection Diagram ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Optional Equipment 189 Keyswitch On Off Panic Solution EDM Radio Key Keyswitch Panic Switch Control Panel Interface CC813 Momentary NOTE ON OFF HOME SWITCHES MUST BE MOMENTARY Access Control On Off OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 Solution EDM Radio Key Keyswitch Access Control Control Panel Interface CC813 Radio Key On Off ANTENNA Solution EDM Radio Key Keyswitch Single Channel Control Panel Interface CC813 Receiver Card RS001 Figure 12 Radio Key Keyswitch Interface CC813 Connection Diagram Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 190 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Terminal Definitions and Descriptions This Section Includes The Fo
96. Only When the control panel has been partitioned Zone 16 cannot be allocated to an area When Zone 16 has triggered the zone will register as a system fault on any CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad If a CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad has been used the AUX indicator will illuminate 8 Communication Failure A communication failure fault will register if the control panel was unsuccessful in calling the receiving party after the control panel has exhausted its maximum number of attempts To find out which receiver has failed Press D again and zone or 2 indicators will light up indicating zone 1 for Telco reporting zone 2 for Safecom Note If the control panel is not connected to the telephone line and no Primary Telephone Number or Secondary Telephone Numbers have been programmed the control panel will still register this fault if Option 1 in LOCATION 663 is enabled and a communication dialler hybrid is fitted AC Mains Failure An AC mains failure will flash the MAINS indicator sound the codepad buzzer once every minute and an AC Fail report will be transmitted to the monitoring station This fault will clear after the AC mains has been reconnected An AC Restore report will be transmitted once the AC mains has been restored for more than two minutes If you require the MAINS indicator to flash and an AC Fail report to be transmitted after one hour enable Option 4 in LOCATION 667 on page 154 If you wi
97. P and GND for keyswitch operation for arming and disarming the system Refer to Options 3 12 in LOCATION 672 on page 161 for more information CP5 Eight Zone Codepad CP508 This codepad is designed to operate with the Solution range of control panels It provides indications for up to 8 zones This codepad cannot be used with any system that has been partitioned Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 186 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual CP5 Sixteen Zone Codepad CP516 This codepad is designed to operate with the Solution range of control panels It provides indications for up to 16 zones This codepad cannot be used with any system that has been partitioned CP5 Area Addressable Codepad CP500A This codepad is designed to operate with the Solution range of control panels It provides indications for up to 8 zones This codepad is designed to be used in any system that has been partitioned These codepads have dip switches on the printed circuit board to indicate which area in partitioning that the codepad belongs to Refer to Codepad Connections For Partitioning on page 180 for further information on how to connect these codepads CP5 Master Partitioned Codepad CP500P This codepad is designed to operate with the Solution range of control panels It provides indications for up to 8 zones This codepad is deigned to be used in any system when the system has been partitioned These c
98. S indicator will begin to flash and an AC Loss signal will be transmitted to the base station receiver after the AC mains has been disconnected continuously for more than 60 minutes If this option is not enabled the MAINS indicator will begin to flash and an AC Loss signal will be transmitted to the base station receiver after the AC mains power has been disconnected continuously for 2 minutes The MAINS indicator will cease to flash once the AC mains has been restored for more than two minutes 8 Enable Zone Pulse Count Handover If this option has been enabled any zone pulse count readings will handover and accumulate to any zone that is triggered during the same arming cycle Zone pulse count handover will only operate with zone pulse count options 8 15 Refer to Zone Pulse Count on page 108 and Zone Pulse Count Time on page 109 for more information Note From Software Version 1 37 onwards 24 hour zones do not receive any handover pulses from other zones 24 hour zones can handover pulses to other zones ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Option Bits 155 System Options 4 LOCATION 668 Software Version 1 10 Only le Description Delay Siren Until Transmission Is Complete Enable Resetting Of Sirens From All Areas Partitioned Systems Enable Auto Arming In AWAY Mode Enable Auto Arming In STAY Mode 1 Table 105 System Options 4 Software Version 1 10 Only Delay Siren Until Tran
99. STAY Mode This option will need to be enabled if audible alarms are required when the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 4 Code Only To Isolate If this option has been selected the procedure for isolating zones changes from the method of standard isolating to one that requires the use of a valid user code Refer to Isolating Zones on page 41 for further information H Enable Codepad Extinguish Mode If this option has been enabled all indicators on the remote codepads will extinguish if a button is not pressed for 60 seconds The indicators will illuminate when there is an alarm except a silent alarm when a button is pressed on the codepad when the AC mains fail beeps or 1f the entry timer has been activated Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 158 Solution 16 Solutiaon 16 Safecom Installation Manual Consumer Options 1 LOCATION 669 Software Version 1 20 Onwards 2 Description Enable The STAY LED To Display Day Alarm ON OFF Status Enable Operation Of Sirens amp Strobe In STAY Mode Enable AUX LED To Display Telephone Line In Use On Partitioned Codepad Enable Codepad Extinguish Mode Table 109 Consumer Options 1 Software Version 1 20 Onwards Enable STAY LED To Display Day Alarm ON OFF Status If this option has been selected the STAY indicator will be used to display when day alarm has been enabled The STAY indicator will blink once every 3 seconds while day
100. TAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 The output will reset when the system has been disarmed Alarm When In AWAY Mode This output will operate whenever an audible or silent zone alarm has triggered when the system has been armed in the AWAY Mode The output will reset when the system has been disarmed Fire Alarm Resetting This output will operate when a 24 hour fire zone is triggered The output will reset once a valid user code has been entered or when siren run time expires If the control panel has been partitioned a user code allocated to another area may reset this output Fire Alarm Latching This output will operate when a 24 hour fire zone has triggered and will reset when the system has been armed or disarmed If the system has been partitioned the output will reset when any area has been armed or disarmed Fire Alarm Verification New Software Version 1 37 Onwards This feature is used on some commercial fire control panels to reduce false alarms on smoke detectors It is conceptually very similar to zone pulse count as used in some motion detectors Basically a fire zone is allotted a pulse count of 3 pulses over a period of 3 minutes If the smoke detector trips the voltage to the smoke detector is disconnected for 15 seconds and then reapplied No alarm has registered If within 3 minutes of the first trigger the unit triggers again no alarm will be registered and the voltage to the smoke detector will again be disconnected for 1
101. Version 1 10 Only Page 155 System Options 4 1 Delay Siren Until Transmission ls Complete 2 Enable Resetting Of Sirens From All Areas Partitioned Systems Only 4 Enable Auto Arming In AWAY Mode 8 Enable Auto Arming In STAY Mode Location 668 New Software Version 1 20 Onwards Page 156 H 1 Delay Siren Until Transmission Is Complete System Options 4 2 Enable Resetting Of Sirens From All Areas Partitioned Systems Only 4 Ignore AC Mains Fail New Software Version 1 30 Onwards 8 Enable Auto Arming In STAY Mode H Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 216 Solution 16 Solutiaon 16 Safecom Installation Manual Location 669 Software Version 1 10 Only Page 157 Consumer Options 1 1 Enable Entry Guard Delay In STAY Mode 2 Enable Operation Of Sirens 8 Strobe In STAY Mode 4 Code Only To Isolate 8 Enable Codepad Extinguish Mode Location 669 New Software Version 1 20 Onwards Consumer Options 1 1 Enable The STAY LED To Display Day Alarm ON OFF State P 2 Enable Operation Of Sirens amp Strobe In STAY Mode 4 Partitioned Codepad AUX LED To Display Telephone Line In Use 8 Enable Codepad Extinguish Mode Location 670 Page 159 Consumer Options 2 1 Enable User Code 0 AWAY Function To Arm Disarm All Areas 2 Enable Single Button Arming In AWAY STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 4 Enable Single Button Disarming From STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 8 Enable Alarm Memory
102. WAY Moder 161 Arm Disarm In AWAY Mode 163 Latching Output 63 Lockout Dial is 107 EE 107 Low Bata 42 113 119 Dynamic Battery Test Only On Am 166 M MAINS Indicator cooooconcnocconnconocononanonanonanonnnons 33 34 171 Master Cod tiie Baie 99 Master Code Function Adding Deleting User Code 51 Arm All Areas At Same Time oooooocnnonnnconncnoncconnninnnss 50 Date ad Tie e 58 Disarm All Areas At Same TiMO ooocooccoonncconncconnc nnss 50 Event Memory Recall 55 Program Domestic Phone Numbers 54 Program STAY Mode 2 Zones 59 Turn Day Alarm OniOff eceeceeceeceeeteeseeeteeesees 58 Turn Outputs On OT 57 Walk KE 56 Master Partitioned Codepad Area Display Indieators 170 Area On Off Indiceators 170 AUX Indicatore conc conan conos 171 BAULT TidicatOra eeug ege deed 171 MAINS Indicator ooooconooccnonnconnnconnnconnnonnnccnnnccnnnnonns 171 PARTIAL Indicator coooocconccconnnoonncconononnnccnnnnonnnncnno 171 ZONE Indicator Serea ana 170 Medical Alarm tia zer A 40 Modem Call MEDTATT Ae EE EE 63 Modem Module 154 184 Momentary Input AMA A ias 163 Arm In AWAY Mode 163 Arm In STAY Mode 1 163 Arm In STAY Mode 2 163 Arm Disarm Area 4 163 Arm Disarm In AWAY Mode 161 162 Disarm Area AA oia aa 163 Disarm Oli eee ete ee 163 Momentary Or Latching Keyswitch oooooooccinn o 197 N Night Arm Station A 186 E shes eee Beh Oe es 153 O Off Indicator Zone Sealed 34 On Indicator Zone In Alarm 34 Open Close Reports
103. a new customer in the Alarm Link Software the Subscriber ID Number and the Installer Code will need to match that of the control panel for synchronisation when making connection to the control panel If these two locations do not match that of the control panel the computer and the control panel will not synchronise Direct Connect The direct connect feature has been incorporated giving the installer a simple method for programming the Saiutian 16 control panel at the office There is no need for telephone lines or modems which makes programming of the control panel completed easily in minutes It can also be used on site visits where the installer is using a portable personal computer All that is required is the Direct Link Cable CC808 connected to the relevant serial port on your IBM or compatible computer and the other end to the Auxiliary Module socket on the control panel When using the direct connect method of connecting to the control panel Option 4 in LOCATION 663 on page 150 does not require to be enabled The direct connect method of connecting to the control panel will operate regardless of this option set Note If the Solutian 16 has an optional Voice Module connected and enabled the direct connect method of connecting to the control panel will not function unless Option 15 in LOCATION 050 has been disabled and the Voice Module disabled prior to the connection being made Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limit
104. able options that may be performed via the telephone Refer to LOCATION 671 on page 160 to enable the options required to the used when using the DTMF Command Module The DTMF Command Module also allows domestic dialling to be acknowledged by pressing the button on your telephone New Software Version 1 32 Onwards Operation Software From Version 1 10 How To Establish A Communication Link With Your Control Panel Non Partitioned System 1 Dial the telephone number that the control panel has been connected to When the control panel answers your call a short Jingle will be heard 2 After the jingle press the button on your telephone during the pause You will then hear a second jingle You have now established a communication link Operation Software From Version 1 20 How To Establish A Communication Link With Your Control Panel Non Partitioned System 1 Dial the telephone number that the control panel has been connected to When the control panel answers your call a short Jingle will be heard 2 After the jingle press the oJ button on your telephone during the pause You will then hear a second jingle You have now established a communication link Note If your control panel has been partitioned pressing to establish a communication link will not work Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 68 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual To Establish A Communicat
105. ager Password 87 Converting ASCII Characters To Hexadecmga nn nro n ron rrnn rro n nro n rra rnn rn rra n ranas 88 PET Alpha Pager N at EES 88 Logging System Events Via Serial Printer cccsccssessseeseesseeseeeseceseceeecseeesecnsecsnecseessecnsecsecseesseeeeeseeesaeeeseseaesnnesnseens 89 Printer Output Baud atb otal A idad cotas 89 BASE STATION INFORMATION wi cssssssscssesetsacsscasdaancssnnccsnssduannsdenncsedsebuanassvacstessdvesivisseeonsvassseesssaas JL BASE STATION INFORMATION ccccsscsssscsscsssssescsssssescnsesssccscesevsesensevaesenseseesenseracassaensnaseasseeasaaensosessenaesesserseseseseesnees 92 How To Program A Phone Number 92 Primary Telephone Numbers o aaa 92 Secondary Telephone Numb gneve EELER E R E i 93 Callback TelephonesNum ber eg eege eebe eg ees iesse Eed Seele Seege geesb teas dees deele 93 CS A A A ae HE ee 93 Handshake Tod eg enee EE cn ides tesco Eer Sede a a ae ee a eed Sel et 94 RE E 94 rer SR UE DEE A eege eege ee Ee ed ee eene 95 Subscriber E RUE ds E vata 96 Rang EE 96 Answering Machine Bypass das 96 ACCESS CODES wi isccsesscsssisa a rE TOE EEE cadasicesaena Aaa 98 Installer Gelee eene ee ee Eege 98 Us ECO de E E 98 UsEECOdS PIN a 99 Auxiliary atado 101 Auxiliary Codo La id ele e Mao ees Naat Me dd e a e A e 101 AURA Code tana 101 Code Reti S i snaaien Eed Eer A EE 101 ZONE PROGRAMMING sett e iii ad a Lia 104 Zone Operating Information dad 104 Zone Reporting Information
106. ansmission Speed 1 Pulse Per Second 20 Pulses Per Second 10 Pulses Per Second 20 Pulses Per Second Fixed Digit Length 15 Pulses Per Second pn 40 Pulses Per Second Receivers and Their Formats The following is a list of some compatible control room receivers their specific handshake tones and transmission formats Use this table only as a guide when selecting the transmission format Receiver Type Transmission Format Silent Knight 10 PPS 1400 Hz HS 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 Ademco Slow Sescoa 20 PPS 2300 Hz 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 Franklin DCI Vertex Ademco 10 PPS 1400 Hz HS 3 1 3 2 4 1 44 20 PPS 2300 Hz HS 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 40 PPS 1400 Hz HS 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 DTMF Hi Low HS Expanded Format 4 2 Express 10 PPS 1400 Hz HS or 2300 Hz HS 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 20 PPS 1400 Hz HS or 2300 Hz HS 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 40 PPS 1400 Hz HS or 2300 Hz HS 3 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 DTMF 1400 Hz HS or 2300 Hz or Hi Low 4 2 or 4 2 CS DTMF Hi Low HS Expanded Format Table 46 Receivers and Their Formats If your base station receiver type is not listed above do not despair there are many combinations of formats speeds and handshake tones Try a few combinations and you will more than likely find the one that works for your receiver It should be noted that some formats offer much more detailed information than others so take the time to consider the many alternatives being offered Electronics Design amp M
107. anufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 96 Solution 16 Salution 146 Safecom Installation Manual Subscriber ID Number LOCATION 052 055 ololola This number is transmitted to identify the calling control panel Enter the desired Subscriber ID Number in the four locations provided For Basic Pager Format LOCATION 052 is ignored and the first digit of the Subscriber ID Number required must start in LOCATION 053 When using Domestic Dialling Format the number of identification beeps will be the number that is programmed in LOCATION 055 This gives the ability to identify between 15 different control panels calling the same telephone number LOCATION 063 al This location sets the number of rings before the control panel will answer an incoming call This should be set at an acceptable level bearing in mind that one ring Ring Ring Ring Ring and that a ring count of 10 represents approximately 60 seconds This location only has an effect if remote arming and or remote Upload Download via Alarm Link Software has been enabled If this location is programmed as zero then the answering of incoming calls will be totally disabled irrespective of any programmed options Answering Machine Bypass Answering machine bypass has been incorporated so that 1t is possible to make a connection with the control panel for remote arming or Upload Download when there is an answering machine or facsimile machine on the same telephone line There are tw
108. as been restored the next time the system is armed or when the dynamic battery test reports the battery test is OK Note If a Battery Test Failure report is not required program the dialler channel LOCATION 495 with a zero Program Altered Code LOCATION 496 499 2lolela Location Description 496 Contact ID Event Code Hundreds Digit Contact ID Event Code Tens Digit Or Alarm Or Expansion Digit In 4 2 Format Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or Channel Location For All Other Formats 499 Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 0r4 Table 64 Program Altered Code A Panel Program Altered report Contact ID Event Code 306 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when data in one or more locations has been altered in the Installer s Programming Mode The transmission will report once Installer s Programming Mode has been terminated Changes made via the Master Code functions do not cause the Panel Program Altered report to be transmitted Note Restore signals are not transmitted for this event If a Panel Program Altered report is not required program the dialler channel in LOCATION 499 with a zero Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 120 Solution 16 Solutiaon 16 Safecom Installation Manual LOCATION 500 503 BJZ Location Description Contact ID Event Code Tens Digit Or Alarm Or Expansion Digit In 4 2 Format 502 Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or Chan
109. as returned to normal This will only occur when the system is disarmed Day Alarm Latching An output that is programmed as Day Alarm Latching will operate when a zone programmed for day alarm has been triggered The ZONE indicator and the latching output will reset when the away button has been pressed This will only occur when the system is disarmed Refer to Output Event Type 0 15 on page 128 for more information If the codepad buzzer has been programmed to operate when a day alarm zone has triggered all relevant zone indicators will flash while the codepad beeps once a second until the away button is pressed ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone Programming 111 Day Alarm Operation Software Version 1 10 How To Turn Day Alarm ON 1 Enter your master cope followed by 7 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard How To Turn Day Alarm OFF 1 Enter your master cope followed by H and the away button Two beeps will be heard Day Alarm Operation Software Version 1 20 Onwards How To Turn Day Alarm ON 1 Hold down the Al button until three beeps are heard How To Turn Day Alarm OFF 1 Hold down the Al button until two beeps are heard If a zone has been programmed for day alarm the zone can be isolated in the normal way so that 1t does not register as a day alarm zone Only zones 1 8 can be used as day alarm zones The STAY indicator can be programmed to indicate
110. as the AC mains has restored This output will operate irrespective if Option 4 in LOCATION 668 on page 156 has been enabled or disabled ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs 129 5 0 HES Low Battery This output will operate when a dynamic battery test detects that the battery has failed or the battery voltage has fallen below 10 5 volts The dynamic battery test is performed every four hours from when the system has been powered up or every time the system has been armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode or STAY Mode 2 This output will reset only after a dynamic battery test reports the backup battery is OK Horn Speaker Fail If Option 4 in LOCATION 665 on page 152 has been enabled this output will operate when the horn speaker has been disconnected The output will reset when the horn speaker has been reconnected Sensor Watch Alarm This output will operate when the sensor watch count has been reached Refer to Zone Options on page 107 for more information on programming zones for sensor watch Refer to LOCATION 642 643 on page 142 for setting how many days before a zone can register as a faulty sensor watch zone Codepad Medical Alarm New Software Version 1 37 Onwards This output will operate when a codepad medical alarm has been initiated by pressing the 7 and j buttons on the remote codepad simultaneously This output will reset once a valid user code has been enter
111. ate Modem Call 63 Initiate Test Report 64 Reset Latching Outputs 63 Strobe vests ees sed A oaks 62 Turn Day Alarm On Off coocooncccccccoccconcnononononononnncnnno 62 Horm Speaker enger ida 43 BOOP 2 EE EREECHEN s 152 Monitor o E tor 152 BR 61 I Installer Code ica ea 98 Installer Code Function Event Memory noise 47 Satellite Siren Service Mode 48 Set First Test Report 46 Telephone Monitor Mode 49 Walk Testinin dice dE iaa 48 Installer s Programming Command 958 Enable Disable Zone Stats 23 959 Test Programming Key 24 960 Exit Installer s Programming Mode 24 961 Default System oooocoooninnnocnnonnoonconncnnncnnncnnnnnnonos 24 962 Copy Control Panel Token 25 963 Copy Key To Control Panel oooooonoconncnnocnnocc 25 964 Erase Programming Ken 26 965 Domestic Dallmg eeeeseeseeereeeeeteeeseees 27 966 Automatic Stepping Of Locations 28 999 Software Version Number 28 Instant Zeng iy teenagers dibs 105 Instant Zone Isolate In STAY 1 105 Introduction oooccnnncccnnnoncnononannnononnnnnononnnnnnonanaconananos 13 14 Isolating Zones Code To Isolate Method 41 Enable Code To Isolate 157 Standard Method 41 J JP5 Terminal Block 185 K Keyswitch Interface A A aaa e 153 ISSUE210 DOC Solution 16 Solution 16 Safecom Installation Manual Kiss Off Detection For Domestic Dialling 166 L Latching Input Arm Disarm Area 4 163 Arm Disarm A
112. ating Mode A Fault Indicator A Programming Mode DA Flashing Off Indicator Zone Sealed On Indicator Zone In Alarm ISSUE210 DOC The ZONE indicators 1 8 on CPSO8L and 1 16 on CP516L show the status of each zone Illuminated Zone Unsealed Flashing Zone In Alarm Off Zone Sealed The MAINS icon indicates the status of the AC mains power supply Illuminated AC Mains OK Flashing AC Mains Disconnected Or Fail The AWAY icon illuminates when the system is armed in the AWAY mode The indicator will also illuminate when the system is armed in the AWAY mode The STAY icon illuminates when the system is armed in the STAY mode The and indicators will also illuminate when the system is armed in the STAY mode This icon will illuminate when the system has been disarmed The indicator will also illuminate when the system has been disarmed This indicator will illuminate when you attempt to isolate zones The person will flash once every 3 seconds The FAULT icon will illuminate if the control panel has registered a fault condition Steady A fault has been acknowledged Flashing A new fault has occurred Off No faults have occurred This indicator will illuminate when the system has entered either Installer s Programming Mode or Operators Programming Mode Both persons will flash The OFF icon will illuminate when the system is in the disarmed state and will flash when a zone becomes unsealed It will sto
113. ault Indicators Initiate A Modem Call Holding the D button down until two beeps are heard will force the control panel to dial the callback telephone number programmed in LOCATION 032 047 on page 93 in an attempt to connect to the remote computer The remote computer will be required to be running the Alarm Link Software CC816 and will need to be set to Waiting For An Incoming Call If no callback telephone number has been programmed entering this function will have no effect Reset Latching Outputs Holding the H button down until two beeps are heard will reset any programmable output that has been programmed to remain on once it has been activated The output will need to be programmed with a latching polarity Refer to Output Polarity on page 134 for further information Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 64 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual 8 Codepad ID and Buzzer Tone Change Holding the e button down for two seconds performs one of two functions The first function is to indicate the area that the codepad belongs to when the system has been partitioned The second function changes the tone of the codepad buzzer There are fifty different tones to choose from between 1500 Hz and 5000 Hz and they are specific to each codepad In a multiple codepad installation each codepad can have a different tone How To Determine The Area That The Codepad Belongs To 1 Hold the
114. ay Location 772 Increments Of Minutes 0 15 Min s H Location 773 New Software Version 2 02 Onwards Page 142 Safecom RF Supervision Time Location 773 Increments Of Minutes 0 15 Min s Location 896 New Software Version 2 00 Onwards Page 165 Safecom Reporting Options 1 Disable Safecom Communication Reporting 2 Enable Remote Arming Via ST1000 Base 4 Enable Remote Disarming Via ST1000 Base 8 Reserved H Location 897 New Software Version 1 37 onwards Page 165 System Options 5 1 Enable Send Test Report After Siren Reset 2 Enable Control Panel To Power Up In Disarmed State 4 Enable Internal Crystal To Keep Time New Software Version 1 40 8 Reserved H Location 898 New Software Version 1 33 Onwards Page 166 System Options 6 Location 899 Carrier Sync Options Location 900 Disable Factory Default Location 901 904 System Time ISSUE210 DOC 1 Enable Busy Tone Detection For Domestic Dialling 2 Enable Kiss Off Detection For Domestic Dialling 4 Extend Acknowledge Tone Detection From 30 60 Seconds 8 If Battery Has Failed Enable Dynamic Battery Test Only On Arming New Software Version 1 35 Onwards Page 167 1 100 ms 9 900 ms 2 200 ms 10 1 Second 3 300 ms 11 1 1 Seconds 4 400 ms 12 1 2 Seconds 5 500 ms 13 1 3 Seconds 6 600 ms 14 1 4 Seconds 7 700 ms 15 1 5 Seconds 8 800 ms EE TN rap AL E E AA Page 29 0
115. be enabled The control panel will now allow a connection of the first call without calling the remote computer back to make contact Remote Connect With Callback Verification Remote connect with callback verification offers the highest degree of data security by incorporating a two level security check The first is the Installer Code combined with the Subscriber ID Number needs to match that of the control panel Secondly the control panel will callback the programmed callback phone number to establish the valid connection The Callback Telephone Number is the phone line that the modem and computer has been connected to LOCATION 032 047 must be programmed with the Callback Telephone Number and Option 4 in LOCATION 663 on page 150 will need to be enabled ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Reporting Formats This Section Includes The Following Contact ID Format Event Codes Point ID Codes General Reporting Formats Securitel Securitel and Partitioning Domestic Reporting Domestic Dialling Synthesised Voice Reporting Synthesised Voice Dialling Operation Of The Voice Module Basic Pager Format Reporting PET Alpha Pager Reporting PET Alpha Pager Messages Logging System Events Via Serial Printer 72 Solution 14 Solutidon 14 Safecom Installation Manual Reporting Formats When making use of the control panel s dialling and communication features there are a number of transmission fo
116. ble via the system programming options These two terminals are provided to power detectors and other equipment They are fuse protected by the 1 amp fuse Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 194 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual Solution 16 Wiring Diagram 605 Plug 1 Green Internal Phone Line 5 Yellow Internal Phone Line 2 Black Telecom Line Street 6 Red Telecom Line Street DI E Er Ww E O a 3 amp 4 Not Used Power To External Equipment 12V 1 Amp Detector Power To External Equipment 12V 1 Amp Detector Detector LINK BETWEEN 12V AND COM Siren or Screamer Strobe 8 Ohm Speaker Siren SolucCian 16G Smoke Detector YELLOW sao GREEN RED C G BLACK C mi Battery 12v 6 5Ah CODEPAD YELLOW YELLOW 18VAC 1 3A Plug Pack TF008 Figure 13 Solution 16 Wiring Diagram ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Terminal Definitions and Descriptions 195 Eight Zone Expansion Board CC885 Fixed 3K3 EOL Resistors 12V Z16 215 214 213 12V GND 212 211 Z10 Z9 12V JP2 Detector SOLUTION 16 ZONE EXPANDER JP1 Figure 14 Eight Zone Expansion Board CC885 Fixed 3K3 Ohm EOL Resistor Eight Zone Expansion Board CC883 Variable EOL Resistors 12V Z16 215 214 213 1
117. c s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Increments Of 1 Second 0 15 Sec s Increments Of 16 Seconds 0 240 Sec s Increments Of Days Tens Digit Increments Of Days Units Digit Day Of The Week Sun 1 Sat 7 Month Of The Year Jan 1 Dec 12 Day Of The Month Tens Digit Day Of The Month Units Digit Current Year Tens Digit Current Year Units Digit Location 644 649 New Software Version 1 20 Onwards System Date ISSUE210 DOC Location 644 Location 645 Location 646 Location 647 Location 648 Location 649 Day Of The Month Tens Digit Day Of The Month Units Digit Month Of The Year Tens Digit Month Of The Year Units Digit Current Year Tens Digit Current Year Units Digit Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming Sheets 215 Location 650 653 Page 144 Auto Arming Time Location 650 Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Location 651 Hour Of The Day Units Digit Location 652 Minute Of The Day Tens Digit Location 653 Minute Of The Day Units Digit Location A Page 144 Pre Arming Alert Time Location 654 Increments Of Minutes 0 15 5 REENERT Page 145 Pre Alert Time For Timed Output Location 655 Increments Of Minutes 0 15 5 Location 656 659 EEE Page 145 Location 657 Hour Of The Day Units Digit Location 658 Minute Of The Day Tens Digit Location 659 Minute Of The Day Units Digit Location pn Page 145 Siren Run Time Location 660 Increments Of Mi
118. cknowledge Domestic Dialling ccccceescesssesseesseesseeseeeseeseceseeaecaecseeeseceaecesecnecneeseceseseseceeeeeeaeenseceseenseeneeseneeats 79 Synthesised Voice Report eege dad 80 How To Set Up The Control Panel For Synthesised Voice Fortmat ccccccscesseeseeseeeeseeseeeseceeeeeeeaeeeseeeseeseessneeneeeaes 80 How To Disable Synthesised Voice Dialling Using The Master Code 81 Synthesised Voice Dialling Opneraton nono non ron ron n non rn nn rro n ron n ran rr nn rn nr nn nr narran nr nn rr narran rran nano 81 How To Acknowledge Synthesised Voice Dialling Without DTMF Command Module Fitted eee eeeeeeeeeee 81 How To Acknowledge Synthesised Voice Dialling With DTMF Command Module Fitted A 81 Operation Of The Voice Module ccc scccic des ic cscce inre ei E E EEN 82 Recording The Voice Message c ccsscesseessesseeeseeeseeeeeseeesesesecenecseeeseesseceaecaecaecaeesseenseceseceesseeeaeeeseeeseeeseesseseneceeeeats 82 Replay Th Voice Message nunnana a a e sa E 82 Connection Of The Voice Module mnis tit tei Set te eects ase ethan EA E aing 83 Basic Pager Format Reporting ii ai 84 PET Alpha Pager Reporting 2c a e ie Gal e ee dl eS oni e e o e e eeee 85 Programming and Hardware Requirements ooooocinonococonononcnonconnonnnonnnonn non nnnnn cnn nnnn nn nr non r non r nn nr non rn rr nn narran ran rannnanrrannnss 85 Telecom Access Telephone Number ici A dada 85 PET Alpha Pager Messages ioniiiini is ida de diia 86 PET Alpha P
119. condition Forced Arming The feature of arming the system when a zone is not sealed is known as forced arming To enable forced arming Option 1 in LOCATION 665 on page 152 will need to be enabled If the STAY indicator does not illuminate and a long beep is heard forced arming is not permitted If this is the case you must ensure that all zones are sealed or manually isolated before you can arm the system ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Indicators and Operations 37 Disarming The System From STAY Mode 1 There are two methods for disarming the system from STAY Mode 1 Method one is standard and will always operate Method two is optional and requires to be enabled in LOCATION 670 on page 159 Note Method two will not operate unless Enable Single Button Arming In AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 has been enabled Method One How To Disarm The System From STAY Mode 1 1 Enter your cone followed by the STAY button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will extinguish A flashing ZONE indicator represents a previous alarm on that zone CODE STAY OR CODE AWAY Method Two A flashing ZONE indicator represents a previous alarm on that zone If this is the case a valid user code will need to be used to disarm the system To enable method two Option 4 in LOCATION 670 on page 159 will need to be enabled Note Single button disarming from ST
120. ctronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 24 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Command 959 Test Programming Key This command causes a test to be carried out on the programming key This test is non destructive and any data in the programming key will remain intact after the test has been completed One long beep indicates that the programming key has failed and three beeps indicates a successful test If the programming key has been removed before the test has completed or the programming key has failed the data in the programming key has become corrupt Remember do not remove the programming key while the activity LED is illuminated constantly or pulsing rapidly How To Test The Programming Key 1 Enter Installer s Programming Mode 2 Plug the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on the control panel 3 Enter command LIe followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the programming key has now been tested 4 Enter command ojejo followed by the button to exit the Installer s Programming Mode before removing the programming key How To Test The Programming Key Using The Hand Held Programmer 1 Before connecting the hand held programmer make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer is in the EXT position 2 Enter the Installer s Programming Mode Plug the programming key onto the pins marked EXTERNAL KEY on the hand held programmer Enter command
121. currence of a trademark name we state that we are using the names only in an editorial fashion and to the benefit of the trademark owner with no intention of infringement of the trademark Notice of Liability While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document neither Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited nor any of its official representatives shall have any liability to any person or entity with respect to any liability loss or damage caused or alleged to be caused directly or indirectly by the information contained in this book Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited reserves the right to make changes to features and specifications at any time without prior notification in the interest of ongoing product development and improvement Table Of Contents INTRODUCTION veie i CAAA RAEE EK ERNEA E MENEN E DENES E ATN ERRER 14 OU ESTAR EE 15 RRE ON DC DEL RE 16 PROGRAMMING una A A da tab deat Rae 18 PROGRAMMING WITH THE REMOTE CODEPAD cunsacra a a T Ea aT TOE a 19 PROGRAMMING WITH THE HAND HELD PROGRAMMER ccsssesssseseeseseeseseeseeseneeseeceneeaeeeenecaeecneeaeeeeseeseneeaeeaens 20 PROGRAMMING USING THE PROGRAMMING KEY 0 ceccessssesseseseesesseseseneesesecseaesecseesenecseeenecaeeeneeeeeecaeeaeereaeeaees 21 PROGRAMMING VIA THE DTMF COMMAND MODUL 22 How To Establish A Communication Link With The Control Panel cccccesceeseeeceeeseeseeeseeeseeseeeseenseenseensesteeeneeaes
122. d lead acid rechargeable type with a capacity of between 1 2 AH 6 5 AH The battery is protected by a 3 Amp fuse The charging globe which is situated above the 3 Amp fuse will always be illuminated until the battery is 100 charged Because the battery is pulse charged it is not possible to read 13 8 volts from the battery leads A nominal measurement of 5 6 volts will be evident on a digital meter when the battery has been disconnected This group of terminals are the connection points for your system codepads All system codepads should connect in a parallel configuration back to these terminals The only factor restricting the number of codepads that can be connected is the available power and its distribution Each codepad has a maximum power requirement of 60 ma with all indicators illuminated therefore this should be taken into consideration when calculating your available continuous power The total continuous external load on the system should not exceed 1 Amp maximum Note If the system has been partitioned the connection of codepads will be different Refer to Codepad Connections For Partitioning on page 180 or Setting Up and Programming Codepads For Partitioning on page 179 for more information This group of terminals are the output interface terminals They can be configured to any combination of the functions available via the system programming options They can be used for a variety of functions with incredible flexib
123. d the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash If there are telephone numbers programmed they will be displayed one digit at a time via the zone indicators on the codepad Refer to Table 20 Indicators For Changing Phone Numbers on page 54 for the indicators and their meanings If there are no telephone numbers programmed a further two beeps will be heard after entering this mode These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the last phone number has been displayed 2 Enter the required phone number Each number will be displayed as it entered 3 After each phone number press the stay J button before entering the next phone number This separates the end of the first phone number and the beginning of the next 4 After the last phone number has been entered press the away button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish MASTER CODE 2 AWAY PHONE No 1 STAY PHONE No 2 STAY PHONE No 3 AWAY How To Disable Domestic Dialling If at any time the user wishes to cancel domestic dialling for any reason eg They are moving house and they do not wish the system to continue calling their work place or mobile phone etc they may enter the master cone followed by EI the away button the STAY button and the Away button to disable domestic dialling MASTER CODE 2 away stay Indicators For Changing Phone Numbe
124. de 2 User Code 5 User Code 8 User Code 11 User Code 14 User Code 17 User Code 20 User Code 23 User Code 26 User Code 29 User Code 32 User Codes 16 32 report as user 15 except for Contact ID Format User Code 32 also reports when any of the following methods for arming and disarming are used Arm and disarm via Remote Radio Control equipment connected to the JP5 pins or the optional Radio Key Keyswitch Interface CC813 2 Arm and disarm the system via Alarm Link Software CC816 3 Arm and disarm the system remotely over the telephone 4 Single button arming in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 5 Single button disarming from STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 6 Automatic arming in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Location 072 1I5 15 15 15 15 15 15 asjas 15 15 15 15 5 Location 096 15 15 1515 Dele 15 15 15 15 15 15 Location 120 15 15 15 15 SES 15 15 15 15 15 15 Location 144 15 15 1515 SES 15 15 15 15 15 15 Location 168 15 15 15 15 SES 1515 15 15 15 15 Location 192 15 15 15 15 EE 15 15 15 fis is jis Location 216 15 15 1515 SES 15 15 15 15 15 15 Location 240 15 15 15 15 ES 15 15 15 15 15 15 Location 264 15 15 15 15 SES 5 15 15 15115 r Location 288 15 15 15 15 EE 15 15 fis fis is jis Location 312 olse 079 el 103 a 127 H 151 a 175 H
125. dicator Definition On Zone Is Unsealed Zone Is Sealed Flashing Fast Zone Is In Alarm Condition 0 25 Sec On 0 25 Sec Off Flashing Slow Zone Is Manually Isolated 1 Sec On 1 Sec Off Table 6 Zone Indicators AWAY Indicator The AWAY indicator is used to inform you that the system is armed in the AWAY Mode Indicator Definition PO Systems Armed In AWAY Mode System Is Not Armed In AWAY Mode Table 7 AWAY Indicator Functions STAY Indicator The STAY indicator is used to indicate that the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 Indicator Definition System Is Armed In STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 Sy stem Is Not Armed In STAY Mode 1 Or STAY Mode 2 Flashing System Is In ISOLATE Mode Or STAY Mode 2 Zones Are Being Programmed Table 8 STAY Indicator Functions ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Indicators and Operations 33 MAINS Indicator The MAINS indicator is used to indicate that the systems AC mains power is normal or has failed Indicator Definition On AC Mains Power Normal Flashing AC Mains Failure Table 9 MAINS Indicator Function FAULT Indicator The FAULT indicator is used to indicate that the system has detected a system fault Refer to Fault Analysis Mode on page 42 for more details on system faults Indicator Definition On There Is A System Fault That Needs To Be Rectified The System Is Normal There Are No Faults Flashin
126. dicator will extinguish A flashing ZONE indicator represents a previous alarm on that zone CODE STAY OR CODE AWAY Method Two A flashing ZONE indicator represents a previous alarm on that zone If this is the case a valid user code will need to be used to disarm the system To enable method two Option 4 in LOCATION 670 on page 159 will need to be enabled How To Disarm The System From STAY Mode 2 1 Hold down button oj until two beeps are heard The STAY indicator will extinguish and the system will be disarmed Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC A0 Solution 14 Solutidon 14 Safecom Installation Manual Codepad Duress Alarm A codepad duress alarm can be used as a hold up alarm This will occur when the number j is added to the end of any valid user code that is being used to disarm the system A duress alarm is always silent and can only be made use of if your system is reporting back to a monitoring station or pocket pager CODE 9 away Codepad Panic Alarm Software Version 1 10 1 36 A codepad panic alarm will be triggered when any two outside buttons in the same horizontal row on the remote codepad are pressed simultaneously This is an audible alarm Refer to Option 4 in LOCATION 666 on page 153 to enable codepad panic to be silent 5 al 0 2 eat 2 8 Codepad Panic Alarm Software Version 1 37 Onwards A codepad panic alarm will be tri
127. ding codepad indicators will illuminate 9 After the last digit of the second telephone number press the away button to exit this mode unless a third telephone number is required Your control panel has now been set up to report in Synthesised Voice Format Test the dialling functions by triggering the control panel to report to your programmed telephone numbers ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Reporting Formats 81 How To Disable Synthesised Voice Dialling Using The Master Code If at any time the Master Code holder wishes to cancel Synthesised Voice dialling for any reason eg They are moving house and they do not wish the system to continue calling their place of work or mobile phone etc they can enter the MASTER CODE followed by 2 and then the away button the STAY button and the Away button to disable domestic dialling MASTER cope 2 away stay Away Synthesised Voice Dialling Operation When the control panel has activated into alarm it will commence dialling the first programmed telephone number If a busy or engaged tone has been detected the control panel will hang up and commence dialling the second telephone number if one is programmed The first call however will be counted as one unsuccessful dialling attempt If the second telephone number is also busy or an engaged tone is detected the control panel will hang up and commence dialling the third telephone numb
128. e To communicate with Telecom program 70 61 73 73 77 64 as the password ASCII Characters ASCII Character ACSII Character ASCII Character 28 36 o 38 8 SSC e e ke e fl Ey A A ge a gt A ei N u u ul u a A E kel u EN uN mn Y nin ojx w Wn Li gt a E aju KR NI NINN me QW rN Y A Y o W nN p A gt Table 36 ASCH Character Table Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 88 Solution 14 Solutidon 14 Safecom Installation Manual Converting ASCII Characters To Hexadecimal To program an ASCII letter character and convert that to a number to be programmed refer to Table 37 Hexadecimal Conversion Table for converting letters and numbers to decimal numbers Example If you need to program an Alpha Pager Password with the letter L in upper case you would then program that letter as 4 12 Hexadecimal Conversion Table Hexadecimal Number Decimal Number AM Table 37 Hexadecimal Conversion Table LOCATION 530 539 2lolaloloalolalolola The Pager ID Number locations are used to store the unique number which allows the network to identify individual pagers To program the Pager ID Number enter the decimal characters that represent the Pager ID Number Remember to substitute a 10 for a zero and to terminate the number with a zero as you would if you were progra
129. e Alarm New 1 37 048 353 121 EE E Telephone Line Failure New 2 00 13 050 344 121 120 120 Table 28 Point ID Codes This table shows the different Point ID Codes and Event Codes that are transmitted to the base station receiver when using Contact ID Reporting Format Some event codes are fixed while others are user definable The event codes that are fixed will always transmit the same code as there are no programming locations made available to alter these The other event codes may be changed when required Example If zone 8 is being used as a 24 hour medical alarm rather than a 24 hour burglary its event code may be changed from Event Code 133 24 Hour Burglary and instead programmed as Event Type 100 Medical Note Before changing any event codes consult your base station supervisor to ensure that you select the correct code ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Reporting Formats 75 General Reporting Formats The following formats may be designated to report in either Standard of Extended Formats In all cases the standard format will report to the central monitoring station a Subscriber ID Number followed by an Alarm Trouble Restore or Open Close codes The Expanded 3 1 and Expanded 4 1 Formats will report a Subscriber ID Number followed by an Expansion Code followed by a second line where the Expansion Code is repeated as the Subscriber ID Number followed by the Reporting Channel Or
130. e Same Time Partitioned Systems Only This option allows the user to arm and disarm all areas at the same time that the code belongs to All areas that the code belongs to will arm or disarm to follow the state of the area that the code was entered from ie If you disarm an area all other areas will disarm or if you arm an area all other areas will arm as well This allows the user to ensure that all areas will be armed by pressing one extra button rather than entering a user code at each area codepad For this feature to function enable Option 1 in LOCATION 670 on page 159 This process can be carried out from either the CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepads or the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepads How To Arm Or Disarm All Areas That The Code Belongs To At The Same Time 1 Enter your master cope followed by oj and the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard MASTER CODE oJ AWAY ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 51 1 Changing and Deleting User Codes This function allows a Master Code holder to add change or delete any of the system user codes including Auxiliary Codes 1 and 2 The auxiliary codes are treated as user codes 33 and 34 How To Add Or Change A User Code 1 Note Enter your master cope followed by YJ and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Enter the USER NuMB
131. e Shot Open With Regger non non nonnncn nro nn narran nrnnnnnnnnnns 135 12 Normally Low One Shot Open With Reset nono nc n ron non ncnn nn nro nn non rnnnrnnnnnnnnins 135 13 Normally Low One Shot Open With Alarm 135 14 Normally Low Latching Open iii Edad EEE E inn eii 135 Output Polarity Software Version 1 10 On 135 Taming OF Outputs a ita 136 Pulsing Polatitiess cstes2 2 8 eee egrcde o do een de ed el lo dodo 136 One Shot Polarities ii A EE 137 SYSTEM EVENT TIMERS pomiri NEESS ENEE ubcnsea dusded ek innnsuleed chaancondasuncon sted dapdepsacubeodskeantesdnset data 140 How To Program Entry Exit Timers ccsccssscssssssesssesscceseessecesesonesseesnscsnsenseensesssesseessecenecenesusscesenecenessssenseessesneesses 140 Entry ET 140 Entry im ii A A e ea 140 Entry Timer ii caia 140 A ONE 140 Entry MA td dia e 140 EX ia 141 Exit Timer For AWAY Mode cis AA eee 141 Exit Timer For SAY Mode Detras alcaide a a nega aii aie sra Ee blancas 141 Exit Timer For STAY Mode Zi A dt 141 Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode iss Zeie ee eelere nas 141 Codepad Lockout Tife ai A dd indie 142 Sensor Watch DEEN 142 RE Jammne Dela A ad le 142 RE Supervision Tweete e e e a E 142 System Date a a ates 143 Setting Fhe Date and Tames eene econ e ce e eater She atl ot ibaa che tae ahead dled lo 143 Ato AS ii Ti a E 144 pt emt Pre Alert ugeet ees eege ee AGH a E E WS RE a e 144 Auto Operation Pre Alert Timer sissien eiaei cis 145 Auto Operati
132. e all possible attempts to reach the base station receiver It will reset when the first Kiss Off has been received This output does not operate for domestic or voice reporting formats Dialler Disabled This output will operate as long as the communication dialler has been disabled in LOCATION 663 on page 150 The output will reset once the dialler reporting functions has been enabled in LOCATION 663 Dialler Active This output will operate when the communication dialler is on line The output will reset when the communication dialler has released the telephone line Ring Detect New Software Version 1 37 Onwards This output will operate when an incoming call has been detected The output will reset when the ringing has stopped or when the call has been answered Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC LA N v v v v v v PBEEBEEEEE v E El E E D BG v E El la Er tete bet G o l E Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual 1 Mimic Zone 1 Mimic Zone 9 Mimic Zone 2 Mimic Zone 10 Mimic Zone 3 5 1 Mimic Zone 11 Mimic Zone 12 Mimic Zone 5 Mimic Zone 13 Mimic Zone 6 Mimic Zone 14 Mimic Zone 7 Mimic Zone 15 H H H Mimic Zone 4 DI Al Al Al Al Hib Eb fa ele Mimic Zone 8 Mimic Zone 16 These output types will mimic the zone inputs The output will operate when the zon
133. e control panel Enter command feje followed by the al button Two beeps will be heard and the control panel s memory has now been copied into the programming key Enter command zlelal followed by the button to exit the Installer s Programming Mode Disconnect the programming key from the control panel How To Copy The Control Panel Memory To The Programming Key Using The Hand Held Programmer 1 2 3 A Before connecting the hand held programmer to the control panel make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer is in the EXT position Enter the Installer s Programming Mode Plug the programming key onto the pins marked EXTERNAL KEY on the hand held programmer Enter command 2lelz followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the control panel s memory has now been copied into the programming key Enter command 2lelol followed by the button to exit the Installer s Programming Mode Leave the switch on the hand held programmer in the EXT position and disconnect the programming key Command 963 Copy From Programming Key To Control Panel This command is used to copy data from the programming key to the control panel How To Copy The Programming Key Memory To The Control Panel 1 2 3 4 5 Enter Installer s Programming Mode Connect the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on the control panel Enter command GE followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and
134. e ee a EE 62 ill EE 62 Turning Day Alarm On and Off New Software Version 1 20 Onwards c esceescsseeseseeeneeeeceseeseeseeaeraeeaeeeseeeeees 62 Fault Anialysis MOd6 5 ii A A E tis dinate eden alba a Se 63 Initiate A Modem Call eg Basse eene ie 63 Reset Latching Output uc aiii 63 Codepad ID and Buzzer Tone Change 64 Initiate KO e EE 64 REMOTE OPERATION Sivad tati 66 Remote Armung Via The Telephone ibi a KRE E 66 How To Remotely Arm Your System Via The Telephone ccceccceseesseesceeseeeseceneceeeesecnseceseeneeseeeseenseeeseeseesnneeaes 66 Operating The Control Panel Using The DTMF Command Module 67 Operation Software From Version 10 67 Operation Software From Version 20 67 Upload Download Via Alarm Link Software 69 Directs Connects sz 251 ceo S st oe Urata it a seed lene EE 69 Remote Connect gege A Hien Ba aah bere LEA ie ean A Een 70 REPORTING FORMATS stet ed eet Ee EE sabe E dee EE N der 72 Contact Fi EE 72 Event Codes siete conversa OA a ee wee ep eee orn ete egies Ga eee ee 73 PomtIDCodesi it eege E A E EN 74 General Reporting Formats sess a eisie e REE A a ed a tee eS 75 NO ENE E RR 71 How To Program and Setup Secumtel non nonnnnn nc nn nn nn nr ran a EEE EE nr n E a EErEE a 77 Securitel and Partitioning geteilt Seidel oi es Gates tion hates 77 Domestic Re por tri Ata 78 Programming Domestic Reportin tnemes iin enapan a a r a a a a i a a 78 Domestic Dialling Operation eu d dE dde diia 79 A
135. e i a e 208 Introduction This Section Includes The Following e Introduction e Quick Start e Telepermit Note 14 Solution 16 Solution 16 Safecom Installation Manual Introduction Congratulations on selecting the Salutian 16 control panel for your installation So that you can obtain the most from your unit we suggest that you take the time to read through this manual and familiarise yourself with the numerous outstanding operating and installation features of this control panel You will notice that in all aspects of planning engineering styling operation convenience and adaptability we have sought to anticipate your every possible requirement Programming simplicity and speed have been some of the major considerations and we believe that our objectives in this area have been more than satisfied This installation manual will explain all aspects of programming the Solutianm 16 control panel from factory default to final commissioning All system parameters and options are detailed however suitability is left up to the individual Every control panel can be tailored to meet all requirements quickly and easily The programming simplicity will make your installation quick accurate and rewarding each and every time The Solution range of control panels has proven very popular amongst thousands of people throughout many countries of the world all who have various levels of technical aptitude and ability We have tried to aim
136. e is unsealed and will reset when the zone has resealed They will operate regardless of the zone type chosen ie A zone Not Used can still operate a mimic output This feature operates when the system is armed or disarmed Global Chime This output will operate when any zones programmed as Chime have triggered The output will reset when the zone has resealed Zone Not Sealed This output will operate whenever a burglary zone is unsealed Chime zones will not operate this output event type Zone Not Sealed After Exit Time This output will operate at the end of exit time if a burglary zone is unsealed The output will reset when all zones are sealed or the system has been disarmed Chime zones will not operate this output event type Area 1 Has Zone Unsealed OI Area 3 Has Zone Unsealed Area 2 Has Zone Unsealed 4 613 Area 4 Has Zone Unsealed These outputs will operate when a zone in their corresponding area has registered as unsealed in either the armed or disarmed state The output will reset once the zone has resealed Example Zone l is allocated to Area 1 If Zone 1 becomes unsealed Output Event Type 4 10 will activate The output will reset once the zone has resealed AC Mains 60 Hz Or 50 Hz This output will activate when the AC mains has a frequency of 60 Hz The output will reset once the AC mains has returned to 50 Hz Area 1 In Alarm DO Area 3 In Alarm Area 2 In Alarm 5 5 Area 4 In Alarm These outputs will op
137. e shortened regardless of the time setting 13 Normally Low One Shot Open With Alarm This one shot polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs The output will switch back to zero volts when the one shot time has expired when the event has returned to normal or when the system has been disarmed This means that the one shot timer can be shortened regardless of the time setting 14 Normally Low Latching Open This polarity is normally zero volts and will switch to open circuit when the event occurs The output will switch back to zero volts once the 7 button on the remote codepad has been held down until two beeps are heard Time parameters are not applicable to this polarity Output Polarity Software Version 1 10 Only There are thirteen different polarities to choose from Each polarity is designated by a number This number needs to be programmed into the appropriate location of the output being used to indicate how the output should operate Note Refer to Output Polarity Software Version 1 20 1 40 on page 134 for the description of the different polarity types Option Polarity Option Polarity 0 OutputNotUsed E T 1 Normally Open Going Low LB Normally Low Going Open 2 Normally Open PulsingLow 9 Normally Low PulsingOpen 3 Normally Open One ShotLow JL 10 Normally Low One Shot Open 4 Normally Open One Shot Low Can Reset 1 Normally Low One Shot
138. e will stop flashing 4 Turning Day Alarm On and Off New Software Version 1 20 Onwards Holding the A button down will turn day alarm on or off How To Turn Day Alarm ON 1 Hold down the Al button until three beeps are heard Day alarm has now been turned on How To Turn Day Alarm OFF 1 Hold down the D button until two beeps are heard Day alarm has now been turned off If the STAY indicator is required to indicate the status of day alarm operation enabled disabled refer to LOCATION 669 on page 158 for further information ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 63 5 Fault Analysis Mode There are various system faults that can be detected by the control panel When any of these are present the FAULT indicator will begin to flash and the codepad will beep once every minute Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 42 for a more detailed description on each fault type How To Determine The Type Of Fault 1 Hold the is button down until two beeps are heard The STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash in unison with the FAULT indicator One or more ZONE indicators 1 8 will illuminate to indicate the type of fault How To Exit Fault Analysis Mode 1 To exit fault analysis mode press the away button The STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish Zone Indicator Fault Description a Hom Speaker Disconnected SSCS Ca Diet 8 Communications Die Table 24 F
139. e years from the date of manufacture as indicated by the date stamp and or the serial number on the product Defective units returned by the purchaser at their own expense during this period will be repaired or replaced at the option of the manufacturer The repair or replacement will be free of charge provided that the defects were not incurred during shipping or handling or the damage was not due to causes beyond the control of Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited such as lightning excessive voltage mechanical shock or damage arising out of abuse alteration or improper application of the equipment Specifications Temperature Range 0 45 Degrees Celsius Humidity 10 95 Power Source TF008 Plug Pack 240 Volt 18 Volt AC 1 3 Amp Stand By Current 65 ma Current Draw In Alarm Condition 115 ma Current Draw With No Alarm and Codepad Fitted 105 ma Back Up Battery 6 5 Ah 12 Volt DC Rechargeable Sealed Lead Acid Battery Dimensions 306 mm x 262 mm x 84 mm Packed In Carton Weight 2 5 Kg Austel Approval Number A94 02B 0476 Only With TF008 Plug Pack New Zealand Telepermit PTC 211 95 246 Software Version Number LOCATION 999 DS When using the Hand Held Programmer CC814 you have the ability to display the software version number of the control panel Refer to Command 999 Display Software Version Number on page 28 for more information ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited
140. ed Codepad Fire Alarm New Software Version 1 37 Onwards This output will operate when a codepad medical alarm has been initiated by pressing the Lj and D buttons on the remote codepad simultaneously This output will reset once a valid user code has been entered Codepad Panic Alarm Software 1 10 1 36 This output will operate when a codepad panic alarm audible or silent has been initiated by pressing the H and 3 buttons the Al and 6 buttons the 7 and al buttons or the LETAY and AWAY buttons on the remote codepad simultaneously This output will reset once a valid user code has been entered Codepad Panic Alarm Software 1 37 Onwards This output will operate when a codepad panic alarm audible or silent has been initiated by pressing the H and 3 buttons or the STAYJ and Away buttons on the remote codepad simultaneously This output will reset once a valid user code has been entered at the remote codepad Codepad Duress Alarm This output will operate when a duress alarm has been initiated by adding a j to the end of the user code being used to disarm the system The output will reset the next time the system has been armed Codepad Tamper This output will operate when the wrong code has been entered more times than allowed Refer to LOCATION 338 on page 101 for setting the number of incorrect attempts that may be allowed This output will reset once a valid user code has been entered Speaker Beep
141. ed ISSUE210 DOC 70 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Remote Connect The remote connect feature allows you to establish a connection through the telephone network from your IBM or compatible computer to the Solutian 14 control panel anywhere in the country where a telephone line is present The advantages of this are very obvious and having this facility will allow you to offer faster service to your clients Remote Connect With Customer Control If you wish to configure the control panel so that a remote connection can only be established when the client initiates it through the remote codepad you will need to program the following information LOCATION 032 047 will need to have the Callback Telephone Number programmed and Option 4 in LOCATION 663 on page 150 will need to be disabled The control panel has now been set so that the client has control for when a remote connection can be established To cause the control panel to dial the remote computer to establish a link hold down the e button to two seconds on the remote codepad Remote Connect Without Callback Verification Remote connect without callback verification can be handy where you have a need to perform Upload Download functions from multiple locations It should be noted that by using this feature you are reducing the security of your control panel LOCATION 032 047 should be cleared and Option 4 in LOCATION 663 on page 150 will need to
142. ed to test the dialling and reporting functions of the control panel Test reports will not be transmitted if the Subscriber ID Number is 0000 When programming test reports the control panel needs to know the hour and minute of the day the report is required as well as how often to transmit the report Test reports are transmitted on a daily basis ranging from every day to every ninety nine days Refer to Installer Code Functions on page 46 to set the first test report Note If you do not require Test reports program the repeat interval in LOCATIONS 510 511 as zero Test Report Options Option Description Send Test Reports Only If The System Is Armed Send Test Reports On All Active Diallers Partitioning Only Table 68 Test Report Options Send Test Reports Only If The System Is Armed If this option has been enabled test reports will only be transmitted when the system has been armed in the AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 STAY Mode 2 It is no longer necessary to send a test report as well as an opening and closing report every day During the working week most commercial premises would be open and therefore a test report is not necessary as Open and Close reports would have been transmitted On the weekend however the control panel would be armed and thus test reports would be sent at the programmed time 2 Send Test Reports On All Active Diallers Partitioned Systems Only This location enables a Test report to be trans
143. eeeeeeeeseceseceseceeeseeneenseeneeens 171 Securitel and Partition ii A A ved As ce OR BES 171 Questions To Be Considered When Partitioning cccccceccesseessesceescceseceseccecsceeseeeseeesecscecseesseeeaeeesecaeseeeeeesneeeteensees 172 Open Close Reports Ee AeA ee NEM Ea eae ee ae A AAS eae eS oe 173 Dialer BEE 173 Open Close Codes For eet ere A A 174 Open Close Codes For Area 2 riin sipiin ie EES A SEENEN EEN 174 Open Close Codes For Ara led colas ca 174 Open Close Codes For Ara ata 174 Subscriber 1D Number For Arta linr A ai 175 Subscriber ID Number For Area ui dE dE i n 175 Subscriber ID Number For Area 3 175 Subscriber ID Number For ATEA Aini e e a a ita 175 Zone leegen A E EEE dines 176 Zone Allocations For Ara asia 176 Zone Allocations For eren Zoen e ii 176 Zone Allocations EO Ar a dass 177 Zone Allocations Er e e dae o 177 User Code Allocations iii iii e Eed 178 Setting Up and Programming Codepads For Partitioning non nono ncnnrcnn nr nn nn nn nano nnnnnnonnnnnnnns 179 Codepad Connections For Partitioning ccccescesseeseesseeseeeseeenecsnecseeeseceaecnaecaecsaeeseecseeesecesecesececeseseseceseeneeeneeensensees 180 Optional Equipments neien eee a A Re Pee RE Pee 184 TERMINAL DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS ccccssssssssscrcccecsssssssssscccscsssssssscssscccees LIL TERMINAL DEFINITIONS AND DESCRIPTIONS coococconconoononncononnnonoonnonnonnonnonnonnno non ron nnnnnon ron ron ron ron ron rna naar rn rn
144. elative to the area whose AREA DISPLAY indicator is illuminated at the time Example If the AREA DISPLAY indicator number 2 is illuminated all operations performed will only effect Area 2 To perform any operations in another area you will have to move the AREA DISPLAY indicator to the desired area To Move From One Area To The Next 1 Press the Away button The area display indicator will move to the next area 2 Press the away button again The area display indicator will move to the next area Securitel and Partitioning The EDMSTU was not designed to send individual Open Close reports for each area via the Securitel Network It will however send first to open and last to close reports if Option 2 in LOCATION 664 has been enabled Refer to Table 31 Securitel Reporting Messages on page 77 for the list of reports that can be transmitted via the Securitel Network Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 172 Solution 16 Solutiaon 16 Safecom Installation Manual Questions To Be Considered When Partitioning When programming a Solutian 16 control panel for partitioning there are a few steps that need to be considered 1 How many areas do you need 2 What zones will be common to what areas 3 Does each area need to send individual open and close reports or 4 Will first to open and last to close reports be sufficient 5 Is your base station running Sims 1 or Sims 2 software 6 If
145. elephone twice to terminate the communication link You will hear a short jingle of decreasing pitch to indicate termination of the communication link When Installer s Programming Mode has been entered pressing the button twice on the telephone will not terminate the call You will need to exit Installer s Programming Mode by entering command 9 75 70 followed by the button before pressing the button twice to terminate the communication link ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Remote Operations 69 Upload Download Via Alarm Link Software The Solutian 16 control panel can be remotely programmed or controlled via an IBM or compatible personal computer via the Alarm Link Software CC816 This facility will allow you to make alterations to your customers control panel without the need to leave your office thus improving customer service and saving you time and money For country locations where a control panel may be situated hundreds of kilometres from your office the Upload Download feature is invaluable When selecting the control panel type during the set up of a new customer database in the Alarm Link Software refer to the table below to select the software version number that corresponds to the control panel type required Control Panel s Select Software Version Panel Type S1611 SE JE SE S16_20 Table 25 Alarm Link Panel Forms After selecting the correct panel type when adding
146. er if one is programmed If a busy tone is not detected the control panel will assume that the phone has been answered and will begin sending its transmission The transmission consists of the recorded voice message repeating itself for a period of about 90 seconds followed by two beeps Note A maximum of 6 calls per alarm event will be made when the control panel has been set up for Synthesised Voice Dialling Format This count includes any unsuccessful calls The counter will be reset if the zone retriggers and a further 6 attempts will be made The control panel will stop dialling after 6 attempts or 3 successful calls or a user code has been entered from the remote codepad How To Acknowledge Synthesised Voice Dialling Without DTMF Command Module Fitted Once the call has been received if the call is not acknowledged once the message has completed by pressing the button on the Phone Controller CC911 for three seconds or alternatively by pressing the E button on the touch tone telephone for 3 seconds the control panel will commence dialling the next telephone number If the call has been acknowledged the control panel will hang up and no further calls will be made for that event How To Acknowledge Synthesised Voice Dialling With DTMF Command Module Fitted Once the call has been received if the call is not acknowledged by pressing the button on the telephone at any time during the message playback the control panel w
147. er is on line will not effect the counter When the swinger shutdown count As programmed in LOCATION 757 has been reached all zones that have been triggered will be locked out according to their individual lockout settings Note If Lockout Dialler has been enabled for any zone the last restore signal will not be transmitted until the system or area If partitioned has been disarmed Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 148 Solution 16 Solutiaon 16 Safecom Installation Manual System Time LOCATION 901 904 ojoj ojo Location Description Current Hour In 24 Hour Time Tens Digit Current Hour In 24 Hour Time Units Digit Current Minute Tens Digit Current Minute Units Digit Table 98 System Time Locations The Solution 14 control panel has a real time 24 hour clock that needs to be set during installation Setting The Date and Time This function needs to be used when the date and time requires to be changed or the system has been powered down How To Set The New Date and Time 1 Enter your master cope followed by D and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Enter the day month year hour and minute using the DD MM YY HH MM format 3 Press the Away button when finished Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish MASTER CODE 6 AWAY Example If the date
148. erate when a zone in their corresponding area has triggered an alarm These outputs will reset once a valid user code has been entered Example Zone 1 has been allocated to Area 1 If zone 1 has triggered into alarm Output Event Type 5 2 will activate The output will reset once a valid user code allocated to Area 1 has been entered ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs 133 5 141 So Area 1 Is Armed 5J Area 3 Is Armed Area 2 Is Armed 5 9 Area 4 Is Armed These outputs will operate once their corresponding area has been armed in either AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 The output will reset once the corresponding area has been disarmed Example If Area 1 has been armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 Output Event Type 5 6 will activate The output will reset once Area 1 has been disarmed Area 1 Is Disarmed 5 12 Area 3 Is Disarmed Area 2 Is Disarmed 5 13 Area 4 Is Disarmed These outputs will operate once their corresponding area has been disarmed The output will reset once the corresponding area has been armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 Example If Area 1 has been disarmed Output Event Type 5 10 will operate If Area 1 has been armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 the output will reset Any Areas Armed 5 15 Any Areas Disarmed Output Event Type 5 14 will operate when any area becomes armed if the control panel has been partitioned The output will reset when all area
149. ered first 4 Enable Codepad Panic To Be Silent If this option has been enabled a codepad panic alarm will not operate the horn speaker the bell or the strobe outputs If this option is not enabled all three outputs will operate after a codepad panic alarm has been activated Selecting this option does not effect the operation of the communication dialler Note If the control panel has a Software Version Number 1 37 or higher a codepad fire or a codepad medical alarm will be audible irrespective of this option being enabled or disabled To disable the codepad fire and codepad medical alarms ALL codepad alarms will need to be disabled from transmitting alarms to the base station receiver For this to be achieved program LOCATION 483 on page 117 as a zero This will disable all reporting of codepad alarms and enable codepad fire and codepad medical alarms to be silent 8 Enable Codepad Tamper To Be Silent If this option has been enabled a codepad tamper alarm will not operate the horn speaker bell or the strobe outputs If this option is not enabled all three outputs will operate after a codepad tamper alarm has occurred Refer to LOCATION 338 on page 101 to set the number of Code Retries before an alarm condition occurs Enabling this option does not effect the operation of the communication dialler Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 154 Solution 16 Solutiaon 16 Safecom Installation Manual
150. es LS SYSTEM STATUS INFORMATION 114 Bypass Codes For Zones Reef ete I a ee eo eee 114 Bypass Codes For Zones 9 iii ica Ba eR ed es BE RB he le 114 Trouble Codes For Zones lid A A ee ee 115 rouble Codes For Zones9 16 3 ck eh RB SN AER 115 Codepad R UE 116 Codepad A E 117 Access DM A rece eee 118 NOA 118 EOW EE 119 Program Altered Code id A ee et 119 Sensor AW ah eessen cadet eel dn EELER EE ee ENEE EE 120 Egeter ee Ee 120 REM o 121 TA a a 121 Rai ies 121 TERNA A e td cedo ano l 122 Test Report Re 122 PROGRAMMABLE OUTPUTS e e E EES EEN EE DEE 124 Output Configurations 2 A A ed ia 125 Redirecting Outputs To The Codepad Buzzer 126 Safecom Remote Operation Of Outputs r nn nro n ron rr nn rn nr nn nr nnn ran rra r rn rrnrrnn nn rannnannins 126 EX ai A isis 126 OU LPUTREVENT TY PES a area aleve aires 127 Output Polarity Software Version 20 401 134 Or SS A ee ee tee hanes tects 134 1 Normally Open Goma La adi 134 2 Normally Open Pulsing Lo Wii a 134 3 Normally Open One Shot LOW sz ecc Aida 134 4 Normally Open One Shot Low With Retrigger ccccccccceseesscsseesseesceescceseeeseessecseeeeeeseesseceeeceeesaeenseenaeeseeeaees 134 5 Normally Open One Shot Low With Reser 134 6 Normally Open One Shot Low With Alarm 134 7 Normally Open Latching Low 134 8 Normally Low Going Open 135 H Normally Vow Pulsing Open az 135 10 Normally Low One Shot DA le at 135 11 Normally Low On
151. es the alarm Any other zones that are triggered during siren time will not effect the counter While the dialler is on line its counter is only incremented by the first zone that causes the alarm Any other zones that are triggered while the dialler is on line will not effect the counter When the swinger shutdown count As programmed in LOCATION 662 has been reached all zones that have been triggered will be locked out according to their individual lockout settings Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler LOCATION 757 Software Version 1 40 Only Lo Location Description 757 Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler 0 15 Table 97 Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler Locations This location determines the amount of times the dialler can be triggered before any lockout options will take effect A minimum of one zone must be programmed for lockout dialler for this location to be effective Only alarms triggered from zone inputs will increment the swinger shutdown counter This means alarms such as codepad panic code retries and any other system alarms will not effect the swinger shutdown count While the sirens are operating the counter for the dialler is only incremented by the first zone that causes the alarm Any other zones that are triggered during siren time will not effect the counter While the dialler is on line its counter is only incremented by the first zone that causes the alarm Any other zones that are triggered while the diall
152. ese figures are for local calls only Turning the table slightly a control room with lets say 1000 customers sending the above mentioned reports can expect to receive some 884 000 phone calls 212 160 assuming local calls just for reporting opening closing and test reports over a 12 month period If you use the Solution 14 control panel you can effectively cut the calls to 624 000 per year at a value of 149 760 assuming local calls a saving of 62 400 If we now assume that for each call one line is printed on the logging printer and that one page is filled per 60 calls You will be able to save 4333 sheets of paper per year and at approximately 45 per box this becomes a considerable saving As you can see using the Solutianm 16 control panel will save you money your customer money and will help conserve our natural resources in fact the only people who don t like this feature is Telecom Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 206 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Specifications This Section Includes The Following e Warranty Statement e Specifications e Software Version Number 208 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual Warranty Statement Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited warrants this product to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of thre
153. esised Voice Formats 3 2300 Hz Handshake Tone is required when the control panel needs to communicate in Sescoa Lo Speed Format 4 No Handshake Tone is not recommended 5 Pager Handshake is required when the control panel needs to communicate in Basic Pager Format or PET Alpha Pager Format Option Handshake Tone Option Handshake Tone 1 HI LO Handshake 4 No Handshake Contact ID Format 1400 Hz Lo Speed 5 Pager Handshake Ademco Tx At 1900Hz 3 2300 Hz Lo Speed Sescoa Tx At 1800 Hz Table 44 Handshake Tones Transmission Format LOCATION 050 H Enter the desired transmission format here This location selects the data format that will be transmitted to the monitoring station receiver This location also allows you to configure the control panel for domestic synthesised voice or pager reporting formats Option Transmission Format Option Transmission Format Reserved Reserved Domestic Basic Pager 4 1 Pulsed Expanded 7 3 1 Pulsed Universal 3 1 Pulsed Expanded Table 45 Transmission Formats Alpha Pager Synthesised Voice ye 9 Reserved a ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Base Station Information 95 Transmission Speed LOCATION 051 2 This location selects the speed at which data is transmitted to the base station receiver when Low Speed Pulsed transmission formats are used Altering this location will only effect pulsed transmission formats Transmission Speed Option Tr
154. ff Codes and Auxiliary Code Operations If this option has been selected the system can be armed and disarmed via any system user code and the operation and use of auxiliary code operations may be performed via any touch tone telephone 8 Enable Access To Master Code Functions If this option has been selected access to Master Code Functions may be performed via any touch tone telephone Refer to Master Code Functions on page 50 for more information ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Option Bits 161 Expansion Board Type LOCATION 672 Software Version 1 10 Only Al Option Description No Expansion Board Fitted Eight Zone Expansion Board Momentary Keyswitch Input Latching Keyswitch Input Eight Channel Output Board Table 112 Expansion Board Type Software Version 1 10 Only This location enables the operation of an optional eight zone expansion board eight channel output board or keyswitch operated inputs to arm or disarm the system The keyswitch operated inputs need to be connected to the JP5 terminals EXP and GND Every time the system is armed or disarmed via the keyswitch operated input user code 32 will be transmitted with the Open Close reports Refer to Figure 18 Connection For Momentary Or Latching Keyswitch on page 197 for more information on wiring the JPS pins for keyswitch operation Note Only one option can be selected from the options listed in this location 0 N
155. format 3 Press the AWAY button when finished Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish MASTER CODE 6 AWAY Example If the date and time needs to be set for the 1st January 1996 at 10 00 PM program the date and time as follows MASTER CODE el away 0 1 o 11 2 6 2 2 0 o away 7 Turning Day Alarm On and Off Software Version 1 10 Only Day alarm enables a combination of zones to be monitored while the system is in the disarmed state Indications are available via any of the programmable outputs including the codepad buzzer How To Turn Day Alarm ON 1 Enter your master cone followed by E and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard How To Turn Day Alarm OFF 1 Enter your master cope followed by 7 and the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard MASTER CODE 7J AWAY ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 8 System Functions 59 Setting STAY Mode 2 Zones This function allows the Master Code holder to select which zones are to be automatically isolated when the system is armed in STAY Mode 2 Every time the system is armed in STAY Mode 2 the zones programmed using this function will be automatically isolated until the system has been powered down or the Master Code holder changes the zones numbers required to be automatically isolated in STAY Mode 2 This funct
156. g Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 212 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual Zone Types There are fifteen different zone types to choose from Each zone can be programmed as any one of the zone types listed in the table below Zone Type Description Zone Type Description 0 Lean 8 elay 1 Isolated In STAY Model pt Handover 9 Dez Isolated In STAY Moie 6 Instant Isolated In STAY Model 14 Chime Only Zone Options Zone Option Description Lockout Dialler A Silent Alarm 8 Sensor Watch Zone Pulse Count Settings The pulse count settings for each zone can be programmed between 0 15 Zone Pulse Count Time Zone pulse count time is the time frame or period over which the number of pulses must register 20 ms Loop Response Time 150 ms Loop Response Time Zone Pulse Count Time Zone Pulse Count Time 0 5 Second 8 20 Seconds 1 Second 9 30 Seconds 2 Seconds 10 40 Seconds 3 Seconds 11 50 Seconds 4 Seconds 12 60 Seconds 5 Seconds 13 90 Seconds 10 Seconds 14 120 Seconds 15 Seconds 15 200 Seconds WAI RR Ql Nile oS Zone Descriptions Use this table as a reference to indicate what each zone is connected to Description Description ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming Sheets Location 468 469 Bypass Codes Zones 1 To 8 Location 470 471 Bypass Codes Zones 9 To 16 Location 472 473 Trouble C
157. g There Is A System Fault Waiting To Be Acknowledged Table 10 FAULT Indicator Functions Audible Indicators In general the audible indications given out by the codepad are as follows Indicator Definition One Short Beep A Button Has Been Pressed On The Codepad Or End Of Exit Time In STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 Two Short Beeps The System Has Accepted Your Code Three Short Beeps The Requested Function Has Been Executed One Long Beep Indicates The End Of Exit Time In AWAY Mode Or The Requested Operation Has Been Denied Or Aborted One Short Beep Every Second Walk Test Mode Is Currently Active Or Warning Before Automatic Arming Takes Place One Short Beep Every Minute There Is A System Fault Waiting To Be Acknowledged Table 11 Audible Indications Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 34 Solution 14 Solutidon 14 Safecom Installation Manual LCD Codepad Indicators The LCD fixed icon codepads provide full zone status indication at all times as well as a number of special icons which indicate such things as system armed system disarmed mains fail system fault and other system functions The following table outlines all of the indicators that will be found on the CP5 Eight Zone LCD Codepad CP508L and the CP5 Sixteen Zone LCD Codepad CP516L Zone Indicators LD Mains Indicator PU Armed In AWAY Mode QA Armed In STAY Mode A System Disarmed O Zone Isol
158. ggered when either the H and Al buttons or the and buttons are pressed simultaneously This is an audible alarm Refer to Option 4 in LOCATION 666 on page 153 to enable codepad panic to be silent A1J s star J away Codepad Fire Alarm Software Version 1 37 Onwards A codepad fire alarm will be triggered when the Al and e buttons on the remote codepad are pressed simultaneously This is an audible alarm A distinct fire sound is emitted through the horn speaker to indicate this type of alarm condition The fire sound is different to the burglary sound la 6 Codepad Medical Alarm Software Version 1 37 A codepad medical alarm will be triggered when the H and j buttons on the codepad are pressed simultaneously This is an audible alarm k Note To disable both the reporting and the audible alarms for codepad panic codepad fire and codepad medical alarms the following will need to be programmed In LOCATION 666 on page 153 Option 2 Enable Codepad Panic To Be Silent will need to be enabled You will also need to program LOCATION 483 on page 117 as 0 ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Indicators and Operations 41 Isolating Zones When a zone is isolated access is allowed into that zone at all times Isolating zones is performed by one of two methods One way requires the use of a valid user code while the other way does not The ability
159. hand held radio remote Indication beeps can be provided via the horn speakers when arming and disarming using this interface board Refer to Option 8 in LOCATION 665 on page 152 for more information As you can see the radio key keyswitch interface allows you the flexibility to perform quite a number of functions cheaply and easily No Of Beeps System Status System Disarmed System Armed In AWAY Mode System Armed In STAY Mode 1 Table 131 Horn Speaker Beeps 2 Channel Radio Interface RE005 The EDM 2 channel radio interface has been designed to allow customers to remotely operate Solution control panels and control two on board relays The interface may also be used as a stand alone receiver independent of a Solution control panel and used solely for remote control of external devices connected to the two on board relays The interface s operating frequency is 304 Mhz with the ability to store up to 120 radio remote codes When connecting the interface to a Solution control panel there is only a three wire connection in parallel to the codepad and Option in LOCATION 666 on page 153 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 188 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Radio On Off Home Panic ANTENNA EDM 4 CHANNEL RECEIVER EXPANDER RE004 ON OFF HOME SPARE PANIC NOTE ALL OUTPUTS MUST BE SET TO MOMENTARY CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 C NC NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC N
160. he Master Code Functions described on page 50 More than one user code can be allocated to this priority level Isolating zones will only be allowed by using the method Code To Isolate once this priority level has been set Refer to Isolating Zones on page 41 for further information Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 100 User Code 3 Location 080 087 COCO e User Code 6 Location 104 111 COCO e User Code 9 Location 128 135 CODO No User Code 12 Location 152 159 splisi e User Code 15 Location 176 183 pslis e User Code 18 Location 200 207 splisi e User Code 21 Location 224 231 psti e User Code 24 Location 248 255 Skill o User Code 27 Location 272 279 zk e User Code 30 Location 296 303 COCHE Note Solution 16 Solution 16 Safecom Installation Manual User Code 1 User Code 4 User Code 7 User Code 10 User Code 13 User Code 16 User Code 19 User Code 22 User Code 25 User Code 28 User Code 31 Location 064 DDDISEE Location 088 cldlgichddy Location 112 sfissa Location 136 cldachddy Location 160 cldgchddy Location 184 cldlgchddy Location 208 sfissa Location 232 cldgchddy Location 256 Plessis Location 280 Psp spsps Location 304 ish s spshisfs 071 095 H 119 D 143 a 167 H 191 H 215 H 239 H 263 H 287 D 311 H User Co
161. he next time the system is armed How To Enter Satellite Siren Service Mode 1 Enter your INSTALLER cone followed by D and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard INSTALLER CODE al 5 E AWAY ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 7 System Functions 49 Telephone Monitor Mode On and Off Telephone monitor mode allows the remote codepad to be used for a visual representation of data transmissions between the control panel and the base station receiver The dialling sequence is also shown in this mode The codepad will beep once every two seconds while telephone monitor mode is turned on regardless of whether the system is in Installer s Programming Mode or normal operating mode The first five indicators are used to display the progressive steps for a transmission to the base station receiver Zone LED Dialling Event 1 Telephone Line Seized Dialling Phone Number 3 Handshake Received Data Is Being Transmitted Kiss Off Received Telephone Line Released Table 17 Telephone Monitor Mode Indications How To Turn Telephone Monitor Mode On 1 Enter your INSTALLER cone followed by 7 and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard INSTALLER CODE 17 E AWAY How To Turn Telephone Monitor Mode Off 1 Enter your vsTaLer cove followed by H and the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard INSTALLER CODE SS 17 d AWAY note To test the on b
162. held programmer the zones will be displayed on the seven segment displays from left to right If there is a dash illuminated on the display the corresponding zone is unsealed and if the display is blank the zone is sealed The third or centre display shows either the number 4 or the number 8 The number 4 constantly illuminated indicates that zones 4 are being displayed The number 8 constantly illuminated indicates that zones 5 8 are being displayed The number 4 flashing indicates zones 9 12 are being displayed The number 8 flashing indicates that zones 13 16 are being displayed Pressing the button will toggle the display between the zones This feature will prove to be very useful during installation as it allows you to view the status of the zones directly at the control panel saving you time and money How To Enable Zone Status Mode 1 Enter Installers Programming Mode 2 Enter command LIe followed by the button Two beeps will be heard How To Disable Zone Status Mode 1 Enter command 9 15 78 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard Example A in the display indicates the zone is triggered A blank display indicates the zone is normal JAL indicates that zones 1 2 3 and 4 are triggered A flashing 4 indicates zones 9 10 11 and 12 are being displayed OSO indicates that zones 5 and 8 are triggered A flashing 8 indicates zones 13 and 16 are being displayed Ele
163. her areas will arm as well This allows the user to ensure that all areas will be armed by pressing one extra button rather than entering a user code at each area codepad For this feature to function enable Option 1 in LOCATION 670 on page 159 This process can be carried out from either the CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepads or the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepads How To Arm Or Disarm All Areas That The Code Belongs To At The Same Time 1 Enter your user CODE followed by oj and the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard USER CODE 0 away ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 61 Hold Down Functions Hold down function have been incorporated to allow easy activation of specific operations When a button is held down for two seconds two beeps will be heard and a particular function will operate The functions available are listed below a Arm The System In AWAY Mode Holding the away button down until two beeps are heard will arm the system in the AWAY Mode Refer to Option 2 in LOCATION 670 on page 159 for setting this feature If the system has been partitioned holding the AWAY button down until two beeps are heard on the CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad will only arm the area that the codepad is allocated to in AWAY Mode This hold down function does not operate on the CPS Master Partitioned CP500P codepad as pressing the
164. his option will need to be enabled 8 Enable Answering Machine Bypass Only When System Is Armed New Software Version 1 31 Onwards This option needs to be enabled if the answering machine bypass feature is required to operate only when the system has been armed When the system is disarmed the control panel will not answer any incoming calls This option is beneficial in high telephone traffic installations where the control panel could answer an incoming call Refer to LOCATION 063 on page 96 to enable answering machine bypass Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 152 Solution 16 Solutiaon 16 Safecom Installation Manual System Options 1 LOCATION 665 H Description Enable Forced Arming Enable EDM Smart Lockout Enable Monitoring Of Horn Speaker Enable Horn Speaker Beeps For Remote Control Operation Table 101 System Options 1 ij Enable Forced Arming If this option has been selected the system can be armed with zones unsealed If this option is not selected all zones must be sealed before the system can be armed An attempt to arm the system with forced arming not enabled will clear any alarm memories present but arming will not be permitted This feature will be ignored if the system has been set for auto arming in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode or has been remotely armed via the telephone using a Phone Controller CC911 DTMF commands via the DTMF Command Module CC886 or remote operatio
165. id e 32 MAINS Indicators ia 33 FAULT Indicators c2 2 adnate A AA A AA 33 Audible Indicators E EE EE 33 LED CODEPADTINDICATORS iii Ei dd id din dd 34 SYSTEM OPERATIONS sc bid A ai it lead a ad eta eka 35 Arming The System In AWAY Mode coccion sea eE NEEE E SEENEN e sii EE eevee 35 ECC RTE 35 Disarming The System From AWAY Mode 35 Arming Fhe System In STAY Mode Tenia iia Se 36 Forced Arming ici A A dd 36 Disarming The System From STAY Mode 1 37 Arming The System STAY Model 38 Forced A e e 38 Disarming The System From STAY Mode 72 39 Cod pad Duress Alarm e tach is o ie Go hag EE share bes e aa 40 Codepad Panic Alarm Software Version 1 10 1 36 ccccccescessesseeseeeseceseceseceeecseeecesscesseenseeeseceseseseseeeeseseaesneeeneeerenas 40 Codepad Panic Alarm Software Version 1 37 Onwards ccccccscesssesseesseeseeeseeesecenecneeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeseceaeenseceseeeeeerenas 40 Codepad Fire Alarm Software Version 1 37 On WardS oooococcncniocnnonconnconnconcnnncnnnonn nono ncn rro nro rr nn nr nn rn rra nr ran r narran rrannnannnss 40 Codepad Medical Alarm Software Version 31 40 EIA NN 41 Sad a ia 41 Code Tod aca 41 Fault Analysis Mode dae NEEN 42 aul Descriptrons eenegen eege eeler 42 UN Ee A A A A A waves Ad 42 2 1 Date and Time i233 8 ads Beds Se ee ee a Sen ee en Se eee eao 42 3 Sensor E 42 4 Horn Speaker Monitor 43 5 Telephone Line E 43 Gy E F UE 43 7 Zone 16 In Alarm Partitio
166. id fitted and enabled in LOCATION 663 on page 150 ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Remote Operations This Section Includes The Following e Remote Arming Via The Telephone e Operating The Control Panel Using The DTMF Command Module e Upload Download Via Alarm Link Software 66 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Remote Operations This section covers all aspects of operating and programming the Solutian 164 control panel other than by a remote codepad or the hand held programmer There are a number of methods that can be used via the telephone line to gain access to the control panel These methods will prove to be time saving and easy to perform Remote Arming Via The Telephone This feature allows you to arm your system from any remote location via the telephone line For obvious security reasons the control panel cannot be disarmed using this method To make use of this feature you will require the Phone Controller CC911 How To Remotely Arm Your System Via The Telephone 1 Call the telephone number that your control panel has been connected to 2 When the control panel answers the incoming call a short jingle will be heard Hold the phone controller to the mouth piece of the telephone and press the button on the side of the unit for 3 seconds 3 After releasing the button on the phone controller two beeps will be heard to indicate that the system has armed in the
167. if the system has been partitioned Auxiliary Codes Auxiliary Codes 1 and 2 are treated as user codes 33 and 34 To add or change either of these two codes refer to How To Add Or Change A User Code on page 51 To delete either of these two codes refer to How To Delete A User Code on page 52 ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions 53 Zone Indicators Showing Relative User Numbers User Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8 MAINS FAULT Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Ki Us rere nn A il y ci Ki dk IL II II II II Ji Jr IJ Ir iii E KE ES MERA EA METAN 20 i fe Ju Jul II DU UU Jul Jul Jul Jul IR EU IA PU UD ID UI LI Y IA Jl IR A f i i Table 19 Zone Indicators Showing Relative User Numbers Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 54 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual 2 Programming Domestic Phone Numbers This option allows a Master Code holder to view and program the required telephone numbers that the system will call in the event of an alarm For a more detailed description refer to Domestic Reporting on page 78 for further information How To Change Domestic Phone Numbers 1 Enter your master cope followed by D and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard an
168. ignal before reporting RF Jamming to the base station receiver via the safecom network if it can t get through then the panel will attempt to report via the telephone line If reporting can not get through via the safecom network or via the telephone network then the fault indicator will illuminate Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 45 for further information Safecom RF Supervision Time LOCATION 773 Safecom Only Location Description 773 Increments of Minutes 0 15 minutes Table 86 RF Supervision Time The RF Supervision Time is used to monitor safecom activity within the same framer It is used to ensure that the receiver is not deaf in between status polls from the base station This is the time in minutes that the receiver must receive a valid safecom packet on the same framer before timing out If the RF Supervision Timer expires before a valid packet is received the system will initiate a back poll to validate that the ST1000 interface is truly not present If the back poll fails an RF Fail report is then sent to the base station receiver via the telephone line To disable this function program the time to zero Refer to Safecom RF Fail on page 121 for more information on reporting ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Event Timers 143 System Date LOCATION 644 649 Software Version 1 20 1 40 CoJo ejs Location Description 644 Day Of The Month Ten
169. ility All outputs have a common terminal that is positive 12 volts and each output is capable of sinking a maximum of 1 Amp The outputs are protected by EDM s unique Integrated Protection System IPS This makes them extremely tolerant to abuse or incorrect wiring It should be noted that each output is open collector and will not source any current but can sink a maximum of 400 ma per output These two terminals are provided to power detectors and other equipment They are fuse protected by the 1 amp fuse This group of terminals is protected by EDM s solid state IPS system giving them incredible tolerance against short circuits The STRB terminal Output 4 is fully programmable as with outputs 1 2 and 3 This output is factory set as the strobe output and is the connection point for the negative side of a strobe light The positive side of the strobe is connected to the COM terminal This output is normally open circuit going low and is capable of sinking 400 ma The SPK terminal is the reflex horn speaker output with the common terminal being COM There are fifteen different sounds available for the horn speaker Refer to Siren Sound Rate on page 145 for more information A maximum of two 8 ohm horn speakers may be connected in parallel Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Terminal Definitions and Descriptions 193 Terminal Definition N O COMM N C 12V GND 12V Zi Z2 Z3 12V GND Z5 Z6 Z7 Z
170. ill then hang up after the message has completed and commence dialling the next telephone number If the call has been acknowledged the control panel will hang up and no further calls will be made for that event Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC ER Solution 14 Solutidon 14 Safecom Installation Manual Operation Of The Voice Module The unit has two modes of operation being 1 Record Mode Crystal Earpiece Not Plugged In 2 Replay Mode Crystal Earpiece Plugged In Recording The Voice Message In the RECORD mode the crystal earpiece should not be connected To record a message on the voice module press and hold the Record Play switch At the same time commence speaking into the microphone slowly and clearly dictating your desired message The status indicator will illuminate as the Record Replay switch is pressed and will remain on while ever the switch is being held in or until the maximum recording time of 16 seconds has expired If your message is less than 16 seconds long simply release the switch to stop recording For good recording results keep all background noise to a minimum and speak clearly into the microphone approximately 30 cm away WARNING Do not press the Record Play switch without the earpiece connected unless you want to record If you do the current message will be erased and a new message recorded Replay The Voice Message There are two different Replay modes available
171. information using English language messages Once the alarm message has been received on the pager appropriate action can be taken The following table lists the events that will cause the control panel to transmit to the PET Alpha Pager and the messages that will be displayed on the pager Area Has Been Armed Close Area User Data Programming Change Data Change Table 34 Alpha Pager Messages The symbol represents the zone number or user code number in the transmission The following example shows how a single transmission will be received on the PET Alpha Pager A similar message to the one below will be seen when user 1 has armed the system Subscriber ID Number System Armed User UI CLOSE USER Table 35 Example Of PET Alpha Pager Transmission ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Reporting Formats 87 LOCATION 514 529 Tho els 7112 al 7377 dal dal da A provision has been made in the PET protocol for a mandatory six digit ASCII character password to be transmitted before the alarm message is transmitted However at the time of writing this manual neither Telecom nor Hutchinson are making full use of this feature There is however an important difference in what both organisations expect to see as the password for all pagers at the present time Telecom expect to see the password passwd sent before the message is transmitted The password is programmed using ASCII text Exampl
172. ing 109 Zone Pulse Count Handover Zone pulse count handover will only operate with zone pulse count time options 8 15 Refer to Zone Pulse Count Time on page 109 for more information Any zone that registers one trigger pulse will automatically increment any other zones pulse count that has already registered at least one trigger pulse during its respective time To enable this option refer to LOCATION 667 on page 154 for further details Note From Software Version 1 37 onwards 24 hour zones do not receive any handover pulses from other zones 24 hour zones may handover pulses to other zones Zone Pulse Count Time Zone pulse count time is the time frame or period over which the programmed number of pulses must register before an alarm condition is generated 20 ms Loop Response Time 150 ms Loop Response Time Option Pulse Count Time j Pulse Count Time 0 5 Seconds 20 Seconds 1 Second 30 Seconds 40 Seconds 50 Seconds 2 Seconds 3 Seconds 90 Seconds 120 Seconds 200 Seconds Table 51 Zone Pulse Count Times 5 Seconds 10 Seconds 15 Seconds EC RE EN 4 Seconds 60 Seconds For zone pulse count time options 0 7 have a zone loop response time of 20 ms For zone pulse count time options 8 15 have a zone loop response time of 150 ms Loop response time is the length of time a zone must be triggered before it can register as unsealed or as a valid pulse Inertia sensors should use options 0 7 while PIR detectors
173. ing The Control Panel Using The DTMF Command Module on page 67 for further information Example How To Establish A Communication Link With The Control Panel 1 Dial the telephone number that the control panel has been connected to When the control panel answers your call you will hear a short jingle 2 After the jingle press the oJ button on the telephone You will now hear a second jingle and have established a communication link with the control panel Programming The Control Panel Once A Communication Link Has Been Established Once the connection has been established enter your INSTALLER cone followed by the button Two beeps will be heard If no beeps are heard enter a user code to disarm the system before entering the Installer s Code again After entering Installer s Programming Mode follow the steps below to program the new Exit Time for AWAY Mode To go to LOCATION 632 enter lais followed by the button Enter the value followed by the D button Press the button to move to the next location Enter the value H followed by the E button Now enter command ejej followed by the button to exit Installer s Programming Mode The exit time for AWAY Mode has now been programmed for 26 seconds A AA ai e To terminate the communication link with the control panel press the button twice Programming Option Bits When programming these locations you will notice that there are four alternatives
174. ingwood NSW 2148 Australia Phone 612 9672 1777 Facsimile 612 9672 1717 email edm edm com au
175. ins EXP and GND If the system has been partitioned this option will not operate Horn speaker indication beeps do not function for the option type Momentary Disarm Only A momentary keyswitch may be used to disarm the system from AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 via the JP5 pins EXP and GND If the system has been partitioned ALL areas will disarm Horn speaker indication beeps do not function for the option type Momentary Arm Area 4 A momentary keyswitch may be used to arm only Area 4 when the system has been partitioned via the JP5 pins EXP and GND Horn speaker indication beeps do not function for the option type Momentary Disarm Area 4 A momentary keyswitch may be used to disarm only Area 4 when the system has been partitioned via the JP5 pins EXP and GND Horn speaker indication beeps do not function for the option type Momentary Arm Disarm Area 4 A momentary keyswitch may be used to arm and disarm Area 4 via the JP5 pins EXP and GND when the system has been partitioned If Option 8 in LOCATION 665 on page 152 has been enabled the horn speaker will give identification beeps when the system has been armed and disarmed One beep indicates that Area 4 has been disarmed two beeps will indicate that Area 4 has been armed in AWAY Mode Latching Arm Disarm Area 4 A toggle or latching keyswitch may be used to arm and disarm Area 4 via the JP5 pins EXP and GND when the system has been partitioned If Option 8 in LOCATION 665
176. into more than one area indicates that the zone will operate as a common zone For example if zone 2 is allocated to Area 1 and Area 3 zone 2 will then become a common zone to both Areas 1 and Area 3 Zone 2 will not trigger unless both Area 1 and Area 3 have been armed Any number of zones can be mapped to any combination of the four areas to act as common zones Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC User Code Allocations LOCATIONS 724 755 are provided for assigning each user code to an area or multiple area when the control panel has been partitioned A number between 1 15 is required to be entered into each of these locations to assign each user code holder to the areas they require to operate Multiple user codes can be allocated to the same areas Location 724 User Code 1 Location 728 User Code 5 Location 732 User Code 9 Location 736 User Code 13 Location 740 User Code 17 Location 744 User Code 21 Location 748 User Code 25 Location 752 User Code 29 ISSUE210 DOC Solution 14 Solutionm 14 Safecom Installation Manual Option Allocated Areas 3 Aread S Table 130 User Code Allocations Location 725 User Code 2 Location 729 User Code 6 Location 733 User Code 10 Location 737 User Code 14 H Location 741 User Code 18 Location 745 User Code 22 Location 748 User Code 26 Location 753 User Code 30 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited
177. ion Area 2 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Output 4 Location 558 563 LI jd Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Strobe Operation Output 5 Location 564 569 d Ol L Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Screamers RELAY Output 6 Location 570 575 HI Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Codepad Buzzer Output 11 Location 600 605 H Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Siren Operation Area 3 Output 12 Location 606 611 a Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Strobe Operation Area 3 Output 13 Location 612 617 H Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Siren Operation Area 4 Output 14 Location 618 623 H Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Strobe Operation Area 4 125 ISSUE210 DOC 126 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual Redirecting Outputs To The Codepad Buzzer Multiple output event types can be directed to the codepad buzzer so that it may be used to indicate any number of events This is achieved by selecting an output and programming it for the required output event type When you are satisfied that the output is functioning correctly change the first digit of the output event type ie The tens digit by adding the value 8 Example s al Communications Failure This event will operate
178. ion Link With Your Control Panel Partitioned System 1 Dial the telephone number that the control panel has been connected to When the control panel answers your call you will hear a short jingle 2 After the jingle press the corresponding area number that you wish to establish a communication link with ie 1 2 3 or 4 You will now hear a second jingle and have established a communication link Once a communication link has been established with a partitioned control panel you cannot toggle from area to area like you can on a CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad To access another area you will need to terminate the communication link redial the control panel and then select the required area You can arm and disarm all areas at the same time when linked to a partitioned control panel provided that the user code is valid for all areas and that Option 1 Enable User Code 0 AWAY Function To Arm Disarm All Areas has been enabled in LOCATION 670 on page 159 Once connected any normal system function can be performed by simply entering the numbers on the telephone as you would from a codepad HOLD DOWN FUNCTIONS however will not work While you are connected to the control panel if a button is not pressed within a sixty second period you will hear a jingle of decreasing pitch that will indicate that the link has been terminated To Terminate The Communication Link With Your Control Panel 1 Press the button on the t
179. ion will not operate when the system has been partitioned How To Set STAY Mode 2 Zones 1 Enter your master cope followed by D and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will begin to flash 2 Enter the ZONE NUMBER that you wish to automatically isolate followed by the STAY button The ZONE indicator will now begin to flash 3 If more than one zone is required to be automatically isolated repeat step 2 until all zones required have been set 4 Press the AWAY button to exit this function Two beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will extinguish MASTER CODE 8 AWAY ZONE NUMBER STAY ZONE NUMBER STAY AWAY Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 60 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual User Code Functions Partitioned Systems Only USER CODE FUNCTION AWAY Function Description nu Arming and Disarming All Areas At The Same Time Partitioned Systems Only Table 23 User Code Functions 0 Arming and Disarming All Areas At The Same Time Partitioned Systems Only This option allows the user to arm and disarm all areas that the code belong to at the same time All areas that the code belongs to will arm or disarm to follow the state of the area that the code was entered from ie If you disarm an area all other areas will disarm or if you arm an area all ot
180. itch back to open circuit once the one shot time has expired This polarity is ideally suited for lighting control A PIR can be used to trigger an output for turning on lights While ever there is movement the PIR will keep re triggering the output and lengthen the time the lights will remain switched on 5 Normally Open One Shot Low With Reset This one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs The output will switch back to open circuit when the one shot time has expired or when the event has returned to normal This means the operation of the output can be shortened regardless of the time parameter 6 Normally Open One Shot Low With Alarm This one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs The output will switch back to open circuit once the one shot time has expired when the event has returned to normal or when the system has been disarmed This polarity is ideally suited for the operation of strobe lights as they can be timed Up to 99 hours to reset and prevent them from burning out or becoming annoying to others from prolonged operation 7 Normally Open Latching Low This polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs The output will switch back to open circuit once the 7 button on the remote codepad is held down until two beeps are heard Time parameters are not applicable to this polarity
181. itioning The EDMSTU CS800 was not designed to transmit individual Open Close Reports for each area via the Securitel Network It will however transmit First To Open Last To Close Reporting if Option 2 in LOCATION 664 has been enabled Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 78 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Domestic Reporting The Primary Telephone Number and the Secondary Telephone Number locations which are normally used for base station reporting can be added together making provision to store up to 32 digits The 32 data locations are now used to store any number of telephone numbers and subject to the length of each of the telephone numbers it is possible to store 3 or more different telephone numbers for Domestic Dialling Format Programming Domestic Reporting Programming the control panel for Domestic Reporting has been made extremely simple by the use of the Installer s Programming Command 965 Refer to Installers Programming Commands on page 23 for more information How To Set Up The Control Panel For Domestic Dialling 1 Enter Installer s Programming Mode EG eea followed by the away button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Enter Command zez followed by the away button Two beeps will be heard The control panel has now been set up for Domestic Dialling Format 3 Exit Installer s Programming Mode by entering
182. itor Mode On and Off Table 14 Installer Code Functions 2 Set The Number Of Days Until The First Test Report If test reports are required LOCATION 506 513 on page 122 will need to be programmed After this has been carried out test reports need to be initiated by setting the first test report If the first test report is not set the test report will be transmitted in the number of days as programmed in the repeat interval programmed in LOCATION 506 513 Note Each time Installer s Programming Mode has been entered you will need to reset the number of days until the first test report Otherwise the next test report will report as programmed in the repeat interval time How To Set The First Test Report 1 Enter the vsTaLer cove followed by D and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Enter the No OF DAYS to wait 1 99 until the first test report 3 Press the AWAY button when finished Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish INSTALLER cone 2 AWAY No OF DAYS AWAY Note Test reports will not be transmitted if the Subscriber ID Number is 0000 The number of days decrements by one at 2400 hours as set in LOCATION 901 904 on page 148 ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 3 System Functions 47 Event Memory Recall Mode This feature allows you to playbac
183. k the last forty events that have occurred to the system The event memory recall mode reports all alarms and arming disarming of the system in the AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 This function helps with trouble shooting system faults The events are displayed via the codepad indicators How To Enter The Event Memory Recall Mode 1 Enter your vsTaLter cove followed by Al and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard The events will be played back via the ZONE indicators on the codepad in reverse chronological order INSTALLER CODE 13 sie AWAY If the system has been partitioned only the last ten events will be recorded for each of the four areas You will be required to enter this mode at each of the four area codepads Example If the events were as follows Event No Description Of Event System Armed In AWAY Mode Alarm In Zone 3 Alarm In Zone 4 System Disarmed Table 15 Event Memory Recall Example Events The event memory playback will report as follows Event No Codepad Indicator Event Description All Indicators Off Except MAINS System Disarmed Zone 4 AWAY Indicator Illuminates Alarm In Zone 4 Zone 3 AWAY Indicator Illuminates Alarm In Zone 3 AWAY Indicator Illuminates System Armed In AWAY Mode Table 16 Event Memory Recall Example Event Playback Each event is indicated by a beep and an illuminated indicator Resetting a 24 hour alarm in the disarmed state is indicated by one bee
184. ker strobe bell and EDMSAT outputs from operating This option does not allow a user code allocated from one area to disarm another area 4 Ignore AC Mains Fail New From Software Version 1 30 If this option has been enabled the MAINS indicator will not flash nor will the codepad beep once every minute when the AC mains has been disconnected from the control panel Output Event Type AC Fail on page 128 will operate regardless of this option being set 8 Enable Auto Arming In STAY Mode 1 If automatic arming in STAY Mode 1 is preferred to automatic arming in the AWAY Mode this option will need to be enabled When the system has been partitioned ALL areas will automatically arm in STAY Mode 1 ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Option Bits 157 Consumer Options 1 LOCATION 669 Software Version 1 10 Only 2 Description Enable Entry Guard Delay In STAY Mode Enable Operation Of Sirens amp Strobe In STAY Mode Enable Code Only To Isolate Enable Codepad Extinguish Mode Table 107 Consumer Options 1 Software Version 1 10 Only Enable Entry Guard Delay In STAY Mode If this option has been selected all instant and handover zones will have an entry delay time as programmed in LOCATION 638 639 on page 141 when armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 Zone Type Entry Time When In STAY Mode Table 108 Entry Guard Delay Timer In STAY Mode 2 Enable Operation Of Sirens Strobe In
185. l OUT3 O 4 o 17 O 5 e DC 18 10K Ohm Resistor Weem S ae To Solution 16 Oo 20 Terminal GND O OF O O O OF Ot 23 Hp 11 O 24 O 12 O 25 or 8 DB25 Connector Figure 19 Connections For 25 Pin Serial Logging Printer Connections For 9 Pin Logging Printer O 1 s To Solution 16 O 7 Terminal OUT3 Or 3 10K Ohm Resistor O 8 4 E To Solution 16 SS Terminal GND DB9 Connector Figure 20 Connections For 9 Pin Serial Logging Printer Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual 198 Solution 16 Component Overlay Line Fault Module NOTE POLARITY Voice Module or Modem Module or Phone Amplifier or Direct Link Cable NOTE POLARITY Battery Consumption LED When Illuminated Indicates That Power Is Being Drawn From The Battery Programming Key Or Programmer Plugs In Here 3 Amp Battery Fuse Battery Charge Globe Remains Fully Illuminated 3 Until The Battery Is 100 Charged 1 Amp Accessory Fuse For External Equipment LINE FAULT AVODULEA low PHONE LINE JPS AUXILIARY SOLUTION 16 SAFECOM INTERFACE RECEIVE 12V GND TRANSMIT DEFAULT SWITCH Ki oH O DEFAULT B Y RELAY CONTACT
186. l access codes and these two codes must always be programmed differently The Master Code as well as being able to arm and disarm the system gives access to the Operators Programming Mode The Installers Code only gives access to the Installer s Programming Mode and does NOT arm and disarm the system Programming of the Solutian 164 control panel can be carried out via any of the following five methods System Codepad Hand Held Programmer CC814 Programming Key CC891 Alarm Link Upload Download Software CC816 DTMF Command Module CC886 ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 19 Programming With The Remote Codepad The control panel must be in the disarmed state with no flashing zone alarm memories to access the Installer s Programming Mode This can be achieved by entering the master cope followed by the away button The factory default Master Code is 2J 5 18 70 To access the Installer s Programming Mode enter the INSTALLER cone followed by the AWAY button The factory default Installer Code is eleja Three beeps will be heard and both the STAY and AWAY indicators will flash simultaneously If a long beep is heard check the control panel for alarm memory The combination of the MAINS and ZONE indicators will indicate the data stored in the first location of the Primary Telephone Number LOCATION 000 Data Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8 MAINS Val
187. l be indicated by the FAULT indicator Zone Allocations For Area 1 LOCATION 692 699 olololotelola Location Description Area 1 Zone 1 Indicator Area 1 Zone 2 Indicator 692 1 693 i 695 697 698 Table 126 Area 1 Zone Allocations LOCATION 700 707 ololololololola Location Description Area 2 Zone 6 Indicator Area 2 Zone 7 Indicator Area 2 Zone 8 Indicator Table 127 Area 2 Zone Allocations l E E ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Partitioning 177 Zone Allocations For Area 3 LOCATION 708 715 olololelololal Location Description Area 3 Zone 1 Indicator Area 3 Zone 2 Indicator 708 i 709 1 710 711 712 713 714 715 Table 128 Area 3 Zone Allocations LOCATION 716 723 ojojoj ojlo jojojo Location Description Area 4 Zone 6 Indicator Area 4 Zone 7 Indicator Area 4 Zone 8 Indicator Table 129 Area 4 Zone Allocations 716 717 E 718 719 8 720 721 8 722 723 Note Any zone that is common to more than one area will report to the base station receiver on group zero Example Area 1 Zone Allocations Solution LOCATION 692 699 telstatstatalal HEBER BEES Alarm Zones ES ME EM EX Figure 7 CP5 Area Addressable CP500A Codepad In this example zones 7 8 and 9 have been mapped to Area 1 to appear as zones 1 2 and 3 Programming the same zone number
188. l be reported when the telephone line has been disconnected Once the telephone line has been restored for more than 40 seconds continuously the message Phone Line Restore will be reported The printer will log the actual date and time that the report had occurred ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Option Bits 165 Safecom Options LOCATION 896 e Safecom Only Description Disable Safecom Communication Reporting Enable Enable Remote Arming Via ST1000 Base Enable Enable Remote Disarming Via ST1000 Base Disable Safecom Communications Reporting Programming this option will disable safecom communication control panel will only report via the telephone line to the base station 2 Enable Remote Arming Via ST1000 Base If this option has been enabled the control panel can be armed via the Base Station on the safecom terminal 4 Enable Remote Disarming Via ST1000 Base If this option has been enabled The control panel can be disarmed via the Base Station on the safecom terminal 8 Reserved Note If Option 1 is Programmed and Dialler is Enabled in location 663 the Solution 16 will report via the telephone line System Options 5 LOCATION 897 Lo Option Description Enable Send Test Report After Siren Reset Enable Control Panel To Power Up In Disarmed State E A Al Enable Internal Crystal To Keep Time 8 Reserved o O Enable Send Test Report Afte
189. l panel is disarmed The fault will clear after the registered zone has been unsealed and resealed again To find out which zone has registered the sensor watch fault enter Fault Analysis Mode and hold down the D button to display the zone that has registered the sensor watch fault Refer to LOCATION 642 643 on page 142 for setting sensor watch time and Zone Options on page 107 for setting zones for sensor watch ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Indicators and Operations 43 4 Horn Speaker Monitor A horn speaker fault will register when the horn speaker becomes disconnected from the control panel This fault will clear when the horn speaker is reconnected Refer to LOCATION 665 on page 152 to enable monitoring of the horn speaker 5 Telephone Line Fault A telephone line fault will register if the telephone line has been disconnected from the control panel for more than 40 seconds This can only occur if the Telephone Line Fault Module CC887 has been connected to the Line Fault Module socket on the printed circuit board and Option 1 in LOCATION 673 on page 164 has been enabled The fault will clear once the telephone line has been reconnected for more than 40 seconds 6 E2 Fault An E2 fault will register when the control panel detects an internal checksum error The control panel will need to be powered down and defaulted to clear this fault 7 Zone 16 In Alarm Partitioned Systems
190. ld be preferred ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Access Codes This Section Includes The Following e Installer Code e User Codes e User Code Priority e Auxiliary Codes e Code Retries 98 Solution 14 Solutidon 14 Safecom Installation Manual Access Codes This section describes the access codes that are used to assign privileges and access functions for user code holders of the system Three types of user codes exist within the system the Installer Code User Codes and Auxiliary Codes Each of these codes allow specific access and operation of the varied functions of the control panel Installer Code LOCATION 56 62 wees jusis This code is used to access the Installer s Programming Mode and can be between one to seven digits long However after the control panel has been powered up the Installer Code can disarm the system if it is the first code used The next time the Installer Code is used access into Installer s Programming Mode will be gained LOCATION 064 319 The purpose of user codes is to arm and disarm the system as well as perform other specific functions as described in Master Code Functions on page 50 User codes can be any length between one to seven digits long Each user code can have a different priority level allocated to it This controls the behaviour of the code allowing it to arm only or to arm and disarm etc This priority level of each user code is progra
191. le 19 Zone Indicators Showing Relative User Numbers on page 53 3 Press the AWAY button to delete the user code Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish If you wish to erase any further user codes repeat this procedure as many times as required MASTER CODE SA E AWAY USER NUMBER AWAY AWAY How To Delete A User Code Software Version 1 20 Onwards 1 Enter your master cope followed by D and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Enter the USER NUMBER J 1 34 that you wish to delete followed by the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard and the corresponding ZONE indicator will illuminate Refer to Table 19 Zone Indicators Showing Relative User Numbers on page 53 3 Press the STAY button to delete the user code Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish If you wish to erase any further user codes repeat this procedure as many times as required MASTER CODE 1 AWAY USER NUMBER AWAY STAY Note When deleting user codes this function will automatically terminate if a button is not pressed within sixty seconds Pressing the away button will also terminate the session at anytime One long beep indicates the code entered already exists an incorrect user number was selected or the area allocation of the user code is incorrect
192. le Disable Automatic Stepping Of TOCAMOS oa ad 28 999 Software Version Number 28 Communications Failure ooonononicnnnncnnccnnnnencnncnnconcnnnno 43 Component Overlay ccccceseeseessceseeeeesseeseeeseensees 198 Consumer Options 1 157 158 Consumer Options 2 159 Contact RE 72 Eyent Codes caia ais ste ct 73 CP5 Area Addressable Codepad c ceseeseeteetees 186 Cha Eight Zone Codepnad cece ceeeseeseeseseeeneeeeeeeeees 185 CP5 Master Partitioned Codepad 0 0 eeeeeeseereeneees 186 CP5 Sixteen Zone Codepad ce ceeeesesseseeeeeeeeeeeeees 186 D Date and Time cece cceesceeeeseeeeees 42 58 143 148 Allow Internal Crystal To Keep Tme eee 165 Day Al a a aR 110 Enable STAY Indicator To Display Status 158 o ee EE 110 O 111 Partido ee 111 A tere Mids Genres 110 Turn OMO eis O 58 62 Default Systems dd tidad 24 29 RIVE 105 Delay 1 Zone Isolate In STAY TI 105 Delay 2 Zone 105 Delay 2 Zone Isolate In STAY TI 106 Delay 3 Zolee e ata 105 Delay 3 Zone Isolate In STAY TI 106 Delay Zoe idea 105 Delay 4 Zone Isolate In STAY TI 106 Dialler Amplifier Lead 185 Dialler Options 1 150 Dialler Options 7 151 173 Dialler Reporting Functions Enable Disable iii d e ode Seet 150 Dialling Format 93 Direct Connect Aessen see Eeer 69 Direct Link Cable soii 185 Disarini d ici tec ida act tie ia 34 Power Up DE 165 Disarming All Areas At Same Time eee 50 60 159 Allow Alarm Memory Reset On Di
193. lectronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 118 Solution 16 Solutiaon 16 Safecom Installation Manual Access Denied LOCATION 484 487 Asti Location Description Contact ID Event Code Hundreds Digit Contact ID Event Code Tens Digit Or 486 Alarm Or Expansion Digit In 4 2 Format Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or Channel Location For All Other Formats 487 Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 or 4 Table 61 Access Denied Locations An Access Denied report Contact ID Event Code 421 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the number of incorrect code attempts equals the number programmed in LOCATION 338 on page 101 This is an audible alarm Refer to Option 8 in LOCATION 666 on page 153 if you require this alarm to be silent Note Restore signals for this event are not transmitted If an Access Denied report is not required program the dialler channel LOCATION 487 with a zero LOCATION 488 491 alen Location Description Contact ID Event Code Hundreds Digit 489 Contact ID Event Code Tens Digit Or Alarm Or Expansion Digit In 4 2 Format Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or Channel Location For All Other Formats Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 or 4 Table 62 AC Fail Locations An AC Loss report Contact ID Event Code 301 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the AC mains supply has been disconnected for two minutes If y
194. ll be transmitted This feature can also be used in conjunction with the Patrolman Code Refer to Patrolman Code on page 99 for more information If the system has been partitioned an Open Close report will only be transmitted on the area that the alarm had occurred Note If the system has been disarmed when an alarm has occurred only a closing report will be transmitted when the system has been armed 2 Enable First To Open Last To Close Reporting When Partitioned This option needs to be enabled if only one Open Close report is required when the system has been partitioned Rather than having individual Open Close reports for each area a closing report will be transmitted only when ALL areas have been armed and an opening report will be transmitted as soon as one area has been disarmed The reports will be transmitted on the Subscriber ID Number allocated to that particular area Subscriber ID Numbers and Open Close reports must be programmed for all areas 4 Send Open Close Reports When In STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 If open and close reports are required when the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 or STAY Mode 2 this option will need to be enabled 8 Enable Answering Machine Bypass Only When System Is Armed New Software Version 1 31 Onwards This option needs to be enabled if the answering machine bypass feature is required to operate only when the system has been armed When the system has been disarmed the control panel will
195. llowing Terminal Definitions and Descriptions Solution 16 Wiring Diagram Eight Zone Expansion Board CC885 Eight Zone Expansion Board CC883 Connections Of Split EOL Resistors For 16 Zone Operation Eight Channel Open Collector Output Board CC884 Connection For Momentary Or Latching Keyswitch Connections For 25 Pin Logging Printer Connections For 9 Pin Logging Printer Solution 16 Component Overlay How to Install the BNC Fitting How to Mount the Radio Telecom Connection Diagrams 192 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Terminal Definitions and Descriptions Terminal Definition EARTH 18V AC BATTERY BATTERY GND 12V CLK DATA 12V OUT3 OUT2 OUTI GND 12V STRB SPK COM ISSUE210 DOC This terminal should be connected to the green wire on the TF008 Plug Pack that is internally connected to the mains earth Extensive lightning protection has been built into the control panel and this terminal will have to be connected correctly if you are to take the best advantage of the protection provided These two terminals are plug on type and are the termination point for the TFO08 Plug Pack The voltage of the plug pack being used must be 18 22 volts AC and rated at 1 3 Amps minimum for correct operation The BATTERY connects to the red positive terminal of the battery and the BATTERY connects to the black negative terminal of the battery The battery should be a 12 volt seale
196. ly when the control panel has been set up for Domestic Dialling Format When this option has been enabled the dialling algorithm will check for a busy tone This is particularly important in that the control panel will only make 3 valid call attempts A valid attempt is signified by the absence of a busy tone 2 Enable Kiss Off Detection For Domestic Dialling This option is valid only when the control panel has been programmed for domestic dialling format A defaulted control panel will seize the telephone line and commence reporting an alarm condition During its report the control panel looks for a tone either from a hand held phone controller or if a DTMF Command Module is not fitted the D button on a touch tone telephone Once the control panel has received this tone the control panel terminates the report and hangs up the telephone line otherwise the control panel will keeps dialling until it reaches its maximum call attempts With this option disabled the control panel will not look for the Kiss Off tone and will therefore keep reporting until the unit is either disarmed or the maximum call count has been reached 4 Extend Acknowledge Tone Detection From 30 60 Seconds The control panel after dialling the monitoring station will wait approximately 30 seconds for receipt of a valid handshake tone The handshake tone indicates to the control panel that it has reached the monitoring station and can now transmit its messages Enabli
197. mber is required Your control panel has now been set up to report in the Domestic Dialling Format Test the dialling functions by triggering the control panel to report to your programmed telephone numbers How To Disable Domestic Dialling Using The Master Code If at any time the Master Code holder wishes to cancel domestic dialling for any reason eg They are moving house and they do not wish the system to continue calling their place of work or mobile phone etc they can enter the MasteR cone followed by D and then the Away button the STAY button and the away button to disable domestic dialling MASTER CODE 12 away stay AWAY ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Reporting Formats 79 Domestic Dialling Operation When the control panel has activated into alarm condition it will commence dialling the first programmed telephone number If a busy or engaged tone has been detected the control panel will hang up and commence dialling the second telephone number if one is programmed The first call however will be counted as one unsuccessful dialling attempt If the second telephone number is also busy or an engaged tone is detected the control panel will hang up and commence dialling the third telephone number if one is programmed If a busy tone is not detected the control panel will assume that the phone has been answered and will begin sending its transmission The tra
198. mentary Or Latching Keyswitch on page 197 for more information on wiring the JPS pins for keyswitch operation Note Only one option can be selected from the options listed in this location 0 No Expansion Board Fitted Eight Zone Expansion Board Fitted If an eight zone expansion board is required to connect the additional zones 9 16 there is a choice of two different zone expansion boards that may be purchased The Eight Zone Expansion Board CC883 can use variable resistor values enabling you to used one EOL resistor value for zones 1 8 and another EOL resistor value for zones 9 16 The Eight Zone Expansion Board CC885 can only be used with a fixed 3K3 EOL resistor value This means that zones 1 8 can have any EOL resistor value from the available options in LOCATION 339 on page 112 and only 3K3 EOL resistors for zones 9 16 2 Eight Channel Output Board Fitted The Eight Channel Output Board CC884 allows the total number of programmable outputs to total 14 The eight channel output board provides terminals for programmable outputs 7 14 Note A plug in Termination Board CC882 is available for the following keyswitch input options 3 Momentary Input For Arm and Disarm A momentary keyswitch may be used to arm and disarm the system in the AWAY Mode via the JP5 pins EXP and GND If the system has been partitioned ALL areas will arm and disarm in the AWAY Mode If Option 8 in LOCATION 665 on page 152 has been enabled the ho
199. mitted to the base station receiver for each of the Subscriber ID Numbers that have been programmed when the control panel has been partitioned ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs This Section Includes The Following e Programmable Outputs e Redirecting Outputs To The Codepad Buzzer e Output Configurations e Output Polarity e Timing Pulsing Polarities e One Shot Polarities 124 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Programmable Outputs The Solution 16 control panel has six fully programmable outputs on the main PCB and an option of adding an extra eight outputs via the 8 Channel Output Expansion Board CC884 The 8 Channel Output Expansion Board connects onto the pins marked JPS and JP6 on the control panel and must be enabled in LOCATION 672 on page 161 Programmable outputs require four parameters to be programmed in order to operate correctly Event Type Polarity Time Base Time Multiplier When To Operate How To Operate How Long To Operate For How Often To Operate For ISSUE210 DOC When To Operate How To Operate How Long To Operate For How Often To Operate Event Type Polarity Time Base Time Multiplier Is selected from the Output Event Types listed on page 127 Each digit should be entered into the two corresponding locations for the output event type required Is selected from the Table 70 Event Type Polarities For Software Ver
200. mmed in the last location of each user code jsjs 0 45 5 el User Code Priority There are a total of 32 user codes available that can be altered or deleted at any time by a Master Code holder Multiple Master Codes can be programmed Refer to Master Code Functions on page 50 for more information on adding deleting or changing user codes Note The priority level for each user code can only be programmed or altered by the installer ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Access Codes 99 User Code Priority There are seven different priority levels that can be allocated to the user code Each priority level allows or restricts the functions that different user code holders can perform Note 12 Once user code priority levels 4 6 and 12 have been enabled to any of the available 32 user codes the method of Standard Isolating will no longer operate Only those user codes with the priority level of 4 6 and 12 will be able to isolate zones using the method Code To Isolate Priority Level Description Po Amming amp Disarming a Arming amp Disarming Code To Iolate 6 Patrolman Code Code To bat 8 Master Code Functions SSS Figure 4 Priority Levels Arming amp Disarming This priority level allows the user code holder to arm and disarm the system Arming Only This priority level allows the user code holder to arm the system but not disarm it Patrolman Code
201. mming the telephone numbers Note If the Pager ID Number is less than 7 digits it must be prefixed with the digit 6 until the number of digits equal 7 This is only relevant when using the PET format Example If the Pager ID Number is 123456 it must be programmed as 6123456 ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Reporting Formats 89 Logging System Events Via Serial Printer A serial printer can be connected to the control panel to report all events that have occurred The logging of an event will include the time and date along with a description of the event that occurred The serial printer is required to be connected to Output 3 and programmed as follows OUTPUT 3 LOCATION 552 557 Lo fojoj ojojo Select the required baud rate that the printer is to communicate at with the control panel Printer Output Baud Rate LOCATION 756 2 Printer Baud Rate 300 BPS 600 BPS 1200 BPS 2400 BPS Table 38 Location 756 Option Bits Refer to Table 41 Serial Printer Messages on page 90 for a full list of events that will be logged by the serial printer connected to output 3 Additional Messages When System Has Been Partitioned Zone On Area Triggered Into Alarm Alarm Zone Area Zone On Area Restored Alarm Restore Zone Area Area Armed Area Armed By User Area Disarmed Area Disarmed By User Table 39 Additional Serial Printer Messages When Partitioned The
202. mple To enter the Installer s Programming Mode enter the INsTaLLeR cove followed by the button The factory default Installers Code is Heej Two beeps will be heard and the hand held programmers display will show the current data stored in LOCATION 000 To move to a particular programming location enter the followed by the button The data for the new location will now be displayed To move to the next location press the button This will step you to the next location and the data in that location will now be displayed via the ZONE indicators If you press the E button without previously entering a location number the system will step back one location To change data in the current location enter the new value 0 15 followed by the E button This will store the new data into the location and still leave you still positioned at the same location To proceed to the next location press the button The next locations data will now be displayed To exit the Installer s Programming Mode enter command 9 75 70 followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the system will return back to normal operation Refer to Installers Programming Commands on page 23 for further information on commands that can be performed during access of the Installer s Programming Mode Note When using the hand held programmer any reference in this manual made to the STAY button should be considered as the button and the away
203. munications port of an IBM or compatible computer The control panel can be programmed in the same way as one would if a telephone line was used Eight Channel Output Board CC884 The eight channel output board is used to increase the available programmable outputs that can be operated from the control panel An additional eight outputs can be monitored using this expansion board Refer to Option 2 in LOCATION 672 on page 161 to enable the eight channel output board Refer to Figure 17 Eight Channel Open Collector Output Board CC884 on page 196 for connection information Eight Zone Expansion Board 3K3 EOL CC885 This eight zone expansion board provides terminations for zones 9 16 when the configuration of split EOL resistors is not suitable 3K3 EOL resistors must be used with this board Refer to LOCATION 672 on page 161 to enable this zone expansion board Eight Zone Expansion Board Variable EOL CC883 This eight zone expansion board provides terminations for zones 9 16 when the configuration of split EOL resistors is not suitable This board is supplied with different value EOL hybrids for the available resistors that may be used There is no longer a need to replace the EOL resistor when replacing an existing control panel with a Solutian 16 Refer to LOCATION 672 on page 161 to enable this zone expansion board Termination Block For JP5 Pins CC882 This termination block provides two terminals when using the JP5 pins EX
204. n on your telephone Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 80 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Synthesised Voice Reporting The Voice Module CC888 has been designed so that a clear concise voice message can be transmitted by the control panel to the telephone numbers of your choice when an alarm condition occurs This allows the person receiving your call to easily understand that the alarm at your home or office has been activated and that action is required This voice message is pre recorded and can be changed as many times as necessary The message can be from between 1 16 seconds in length There is no longer a need to put up with having to decipher alarm tones and trying to explain to your relatives just what the tones actually mean A recorded message is perfect as it can easily be interpreted by any person receiving the call and therefore immediate action can be taken according to your specific message The voice message can be recorded in any language and once programmed it will be retained indefinitely irrespective of power loss No messy batteries are required How To Set Up The Control Panel For Synthesised Voice Format 1 Enter Installer s Programming Mode EG stat followed by the away button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash 2 Enter Command 9 76 75 followed by the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard The control panel has n
205. n see from the examples below auto step mode is a very useful feature when programming successive locations How To Enable Automatic Stepping Of Locations 1 Enter command 2lslel followed by the button Two beeps will be heard How To Disable Automatic Stepping Of Locations 1 Enter command 2lslel followed by the button Two beeps will be heard Example Auto Step Enabled To enter the Primary Telephone Number 02 pause 9 672 1055 with auto step enabled ie Decimal point illuminated Press oJ followed by the button This will position you at LOCATION 000 being the start of the Primary Telephone Number 10 EJ CJ 13 0 E EJ EJ E CJ E 3 9 CJ 10 E 5 0 6 0 9 0 Example Auto Step Disabled To enter the Primary Telephone Number 02 pause 9 672 1055 with auto step disabled 1e Decimal point extinguished Press oJ followed by the button This will position you at LOCATION 000 being the start of the Primary Telephone Number 10 2 CJ 4 613 CJ 64 6 E 4 5 CJ E EJ 4 E E 3 E E 4 Go CJ A 64 s 0 AA Command 999 Display Software Version Number This command will display the control panel s software version number This command can only be used with the hand held programmer Enter command 9 9 9 followed by
206. n via the Radio Key Keyswitch Interface CC813 2 Enable EDM Smart Lockout This feature allows the control panel to remove any zones that are programmed for lockout from the lockout list while the sirens are running This feature allows a monitoring station to receive codes from previously locked out zones during siren time 4 Enable Monitoring Of Horn Speaker If this option has been enabled the control panel will detect when the horn speaker has been disconnected from the speaker terminals The FAULT indicator will illuminate when the horn speaker has been disconnected and will extinguish when the horn speaker has been reconnected If an output is required to operate when the horn speaker has been disconnected refer to Output Event Type Horn Speaker Fail on page 129 for more information 8 Allow Horn Speaker Beeps For Radio Remote Control Operation No Of Beeps System Status System Disarmed System Armed In AWAY Mode System Armed In STAY Mode 1 Table 102 Horn Speaker Beeps This feature will enable horn speaker beeps to be heard when the system is armed and disarmed via a hand held radio remote control unit Devices connected to the bell output RELAY OUTPUT will not activate These speaker beeps are applicable when using the Radio Key Keyswitch Interface CC813 or connecting a switch to the JP5 pins EXP GND If connecting a switch to the JP5 pins enable the required input type in LOCATION 672 on page 161 No
207. ne 2 Location 337 2 Zone 6 4 Zone 3 4 Zone 7 8 Zone 4 8 Zone 8 DD Location 298 Page 101 Code Retries H Location3389 O OO Page 112 a 1 1K 5 3K9 9 10K 13 Reserved FOL Resistor Value 2 1K5 6 4K7 10 12K 14 Reserved 3 2K2 7 5K6 11 22K 15 Split EOL 3K3 6K8 4 3K3 8 6K8 12 Reserved For 16 Zone Operation Location 340 4670 Page 104 Zones Zone Location 340 347 Zone 2 Location 348 355 2pofojofrfsfofr Glidd Zone 3 Location 356 363 Zone 4 Location 364 371 Zone 5 Location 372 379 rpofofofrfsfofr rjofolofrfajoj rfojofofrjsfof Zone 6 Location 380 387 Zone 7 Location 388 395 Zone 8 Location 396 403 ojofojofrfafofr ofofojofrfsfofr midi Zone 9 Location 404 411 Zone 10 Location 412 419 Zone 11 Location 420 427 ojofofolrfsfofr leidt ofojofofr sfof Zone 12 Location 428 435 Zone 13 Location 436 443 Zone 14 Location 444 451 ojofojofrfafofr ofofojofrfafofr ofofofofrfsfof Zone 15 Location 452 459 Zone 16 Location 460 467 ofolofofrfsfofr ofofofofr sfofr gS 0 0U U Zone Zone Zone Pulse Zone Pulse Count Event Code Event Code Event Code Dialler Type Option Count Time Hundreds Digit Tens Digit Units Digit Channel Each zone contains eight locations that are divided into two groups of four The first four locations determine how the zone operates while the second four locations contain the dialler reporting information Electronics Design amp Manufacturin
208. ned Systems Only 0 cccccececeseescesceeeseeseeeseeeseesceeseesseeesecesesseeeseeeaeeneeceeeseeeteeeteenaees 43 83 Communication Failure ts a ee Se 43 EE EE 43 SYSTEM FUNCTION Soi A e di 46 Installer Code FURIOSA ec 46 2 Set The Number Of Days Until The First Test Report 46 3 Event Memory Recall Mode ue 47 47 Walks Test klod gt aides ei A Ru hb ane oe D Ra dde 48 3 Satellite Siren Service Mods eon ice e ed hiv cam ee 48 7 Telephone Monitor Mode On and OT 49 EE e 50 O Arming and Disarming All Areas At The Same Time Partitioned Systems Only 50 F Ghanging and Deleting User Codes iii eden totes levees bined cgi dit nil eerie S 51 Auxiliary COGS oeren deeg AER 52 2 Programming Domestic Phone Numbers ccccceccesseesseeseesceeceesceeseeeseceneceneceesseeeaeenaeeeseseeeseeeaeeeeesseeseeseneeaes 54 3 Event Memory Recall Mods ii as 55 4 Walk Test Modest il a Riad alte nbd Bi aare eA 56 5 Turning Outputs On and Oui e india 57 6 ICI deg ie keh neh E ah eee 58 7 Turning Day Alarm On and Off Software Version 1 10 Only 58 8 Setting STAY Mode neg a ed 59 User Code Functions Partitioned Systems On 60 O Arming and Disarming All Areas At The Same Time Partitioned Systems Only 60 Hold Do wit Ee EE 61 Arm The System In AWAY Modes poianone ia ele a Med es oe 61 Arm The System In STAY Mode limi iaa dier 61 Arm The System n STA Y Mode Zoco dd iii ida 61 Horm Speaker Ted id 61 Bell Vest ii A ee
209. nel 104 EOL Resistor Value oooooconocccononcooncconnnonnncconnnonnnos 112 Event e sti tias 104 Indica 34 el He TEE 32 170 Operating Information oooconiconinnnocnnonconnconncnncnnnonnos 104 Op 104 DA ENEE 107 ISSUE210 DOC Solution 16 Solution 16 Safecom Installation Manual Programming nestiut ierse ssinse 104 Pulse Colt iia is 104 108 Pulse Count Handoxver 109 154 Pulse Count Time 104 109 Reporting Intormatnon 104 Trouble Reports dees dee Nee iech 115 TYPOS iii aid 104 105 Zone 16 Partitioned Systems oooooconncnnnnocnnocnocnconncnnno 43 Zone Options Lockout Diall t tada 107 Lockout Siren inicien 107 Sensor Watch 108 Silent Alarm iia des 107 Zone Status Minden Eed it 23 Zone Type 24 Hour Burglary ooooooonnnonoccconoconoconconncnnnonnnonnncnnnnns 106 AOU E E eat aaeee 106 GE EE 106 A vesevei cosdbeictsivececsnceidecdscvecteateccsesiseee 105 Delay 1 Isolated In STAY TA 105 a ne E EO EE 105 Delay 2 Isolated In STAY TA 106 Delay Finis iaa 105 Delay 3 Isolated In STAY TA 106 Delay Aera liada 105 Delay 4 Isolated In STAY TA 106 Hand Vicio aci n 105 Handover Isolated In STAY TN 105 ISAC ed Ge em aia 105 Instant Isolated In STAY Te 105 Not Used ita 106 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Index 227 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design 8 Manufacturing Pty Limited 25 Huntingwood Drive A C N 002 907 271 Hunt
210. nel Location For All Other Formats 503 Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 or 4 Table 65 Sensor Watch Code A Self Test Failure report Contact ID Event Code 307 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when a zone has not been triggered during the Sensor Watch Time in LOCATION 642 643 on page 142 This report will continue to be transmitted according to the frequency of the sensor watch time until the fault has been rectified Note Software Version 1 10 1 31 transmitted Sensor Trouble as Contact ID Event Code 383 From Software Version 1 32 the Contact ID Event Code was changed to 307 Self Test Failure To clear the fault and stop any further reporting the zone that registered the fault must be unsealed and resealed again Refer to LOCATION 642 643 on page 142 to set the number of days a zone may remain sealed before registering as a fault Refer to Zone Options on page 107 to enable a zone to be monitored by the sensor watch feature Note Restore signals are not transmitted for this event If a Self Test Failure report is not required program the dialler channel LOCATION 503 with a zero Open Close Codes LOCATION 504 505 Lejo Location Description Opening Report Code Closing Report Code Table 66 Open Close Locations An Opening report Contact ID Event Code 401 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the system has been disarmed from AWAY Mode A Closing report
211. ng this option will extend the wait time from 30 seconds to 1 minute 8 If Battery Has Failed Enable Dynamic Battery Test Only On Arming New Software Version 1 35 The control panel will execute a Dynamic Battery Test every four hours while the AC mains is present During this battery test the battery is loaded and its voltage monitored over a 3 second period If the battery voltage drops below approximately 10 5V a low battery condition is generated and reported accordingly The control panel will continue to test the battery even when the battery has failed a previous load test Enabling this option will cancel the 4 hourly dynamic battery tests if there is a current low battery condition The control panel will still however test the battery every time the system has been armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Option Bits 167 Carrier Sync Options LOCATION 899 9 Carrier Sync Time A wm 1 3 Seconds 1 4 Seconds 1 5 Seconds Table 116 Carrier Sync Time The micro chip that operates the Salutian 14 control panel simulates a 300 baud modem Generally a telecommunications interface Phone Line Interface incorporates a 2 wire to a 4 wire conversion so that the information that you transmit is separate to the information that you receive However in the Salutian 16 control panel there is no 2 wire to 4 wire conversion What is transmitted i
212. nnccnonncionncionanon 131 Day Alarm Enabled AA 128 Day Alarm Latching oononncnncnncnnnnnonooncnnconcnncnnnancnns 128 Day Alarm Resetting ooooconconcnnnnnccnonooncnncononncnncnncnns 128 Didller e 131 maer Disabled iia 131 EDMSAT Satellite Sen 127 EDMSTU Securitel ooonooonnnnonoocncnonnconncconacconanon 127 Entry Warning ina 128 Entry Warning Day Alarm Resetting 128 Exit Warning A deEn 127 Exit Warning Finished A 128 Exit Warning With All Zones Sealed Entry Warning EE EE 127 Fire Alarm Latchng 130 Fire Alarm Resertmg 130 Fire Alarm Verification oooconoocconccconnnnonncionacconac ns 130 Horn Speaker Fal 129 Kiss Off After End Of Exit Time 0 ee 128 Loorbattepg ze ugeet ee desl eA eats 129 Mimic Zone Sereia tires 132 Mimic Zonda 132 Mimic Zonda 132 Mimic Zone 7 132 MIME Zone TI oeni A eevee tows 132 Mimic Zone AAA a 132 Mimic Zone IS iii rin 132 Mimic Zone Ip 132 Mimic Zone Zo din 132 MIMI E 132 Mme Zonge Zuse 132 Mimic Zone 3 132 Mimic Zon G ie ENEE des EE e 132 Mimic Zone ee dads Set es 132 Mimic Zone Boisi inn a a EEA 132 Mimic Zone 9 132 Pre Alert Warning For Timed Oumut 128 Pre Arming Alert Time 127 TE 127 Remote Control 1 131 Remote Control 72 131 Remote Control Bianco iaa 131 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 224 Remote Control 4 131 Ring Detect ita 131 Sensor Wath coccion ita 129 NINO iaronn i 130 Siren
213. not answer any incoming calls This option is beneficial in high telephone traffic installations where the control panel could answer an incoming call Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 174 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual Open Close Codes For Area 1 LOCATION 504 505 ee Location Description Opening Report Code For Area 1 Closing Report Code For Area 1 Table 118 Area 1 Open Close Report Locations Open Close Codes For Area 2 LOCATION 674 675 ao Location Description Opening Report Code For Area 2 Closing Report Code For Area 2 Table 119 Area 2 Open Close Report Locations Open Close Codes For Area 3 LOCATION 676 677 ol Location Description Opening Report Code For Area 3 Closing Report Code For Area 3 Table 120 Area 3 Open Close Report Locations Open Close Codes For Area 4 LOCATION 678 679 ao Location Description 678 Opening Report Code For Area 4 Closing Report Code For Area 4 Table 121 Area 4 Open Close Report Locations ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Partitioning 175 Subscriber ID Number For Area 1 LOCATION 052 055 Lo fojoj Location Description Table 122 Area 1 Subscriber ID Number Locations Subscriber ID Number For Area 2 LOCATION 680 683 olololal Location Description 680 682 683 Table 123 Area 2 Subscriber ID Number Locations Subscriber ID Number For A
214. nsmission consists of a siren tone followed by a unit identification beep The identification beep will allow the customer to verify which control panel made the call if more than one control panel is reporting to the same telephone number The identification beep is programmed in LOCATION 55 of the Subscriber ID Number Note A maximum of 6 calls per alarm event will be made when the control panel has been set up for Domestic Dialling Format This count includes any unsuccessful calls The counter will be reset if the zone retriggers and a further 6 attempts will be made The control panel will stop dialling after 6 attempts or 3 successful calls The control panel will also stop dialling if a valid user code has been entered at the remote codepad Acknowledge Domestic Dialling Once the call has been received if it is not acknowledged using a Phone Controller CC911 the control panel will continue to send its transmission for a period of 2 minutes It will then hang up and commence dialling the next telephone number If the call is acknowledged the control panel will hang up and no further calls will be made for that event Note From Software Version 1 32 onwards you can acknowledge the call by pressing the button on your telephone without the DTMF Command Module CC886 connected For Software Version 1 10 1 31 the DTMF Command Module will need to be connected to your control panel to acknowledge Domestic Dialling by pressing the butto
215. ntrol 3 DIE Remote control 4 These correspond to the ST1000 output 1 2 3 Example If you wanted output 1 on the ST1000 to control output 2 on the Solution SC8016 you would need to program LOCATIONS 546 547 with LJ e Remote control 2 Note You cannot use Remote Control 1 when operating outputs via Safecom as this is already used to arm disarm the system via ST1000 software and CANNOT be CHANGED If Safecom is disabled or you don t wish to use the ST1000 software to remotely operate outputs programming Remote operation of outputs is done as normal ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs 127 Output Event Types There are approximately ninety different output event types to choose from Each output event type is designated by two numbers These two numbers need to be programmed into the appropriate locations of the output being used to indicate when the output should operate Note All reset times are in reference to polarity 1 and 8 Reset times will vary depending on the polarity used e o z El 5 A le E EDMSAT Satellite Siren Output 1 Only This output controls all functions of an EDMSAT satellite siren SS914 The option of speaker indication beeps will not operate via the EDMSAT for remote operations EDMSTU Securitel Unit Output 2 Only This output controls all functions of an EDMSTU Securitel unit CS800 PRINTER Output 3 Only
216. nutes 0 15 Location 662 Software Version 1 10 1 37 Only Page 146 Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren and Dialler H Location 662 New Software Version 1 40 Onwards Page 147 Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren H Location663 Page 150 Dialler Options 1 1 Enable Dialler Reporting Functions 2 Enable Remote Arming Via The Telephone 4 Enable Upload Download Via Alarm Link 8 Terminate Alarm Link Session On Alarm Location 664 Dialler Options 2 1 Send Open Close Reports Only If A Previous Alarm Has Occurred 2 Enable First To Open Last To Close Reporting Partitioned Systems Only 4 Send Open Close Reports When In STAY Mode 8 Enable Answering Machine Bypass Only When System Is Armed New Software Version 1 31 Onwards H Location 665 Page 152 System Options 1 1 Enable Forced Arming 2 Enable EDM Smart Lockout 4 Enable Monitoring Of Horn Speaker 8 Enable Horn Speaker Beeps For Remote Control Operation H Location 666 Page 153 System Options 2 1 Enable Radio Key Keyswitch Interface Or Night Arm Station 2 Enable Handover Delay To Be Sequential 4 Enable Codepad Panic To Be Silent 8 Enable Codepad Tamper To Be Silent Location 667 Page 154 System Options 3 1 Enable The Main Codepad To Display Data For Area 1 2 Enable External Modem Module For Alarm Link Operation 4 Enabled AC Fail In One Hour Disabled AC Fail In Two Minutes 8 Enable Pulse Count Handover o Location 668 Software
217. ny other zones that are triggered during siren time will not effect the counter While the dialler is on line its counter is only incremented by the first zone that causes the alarm Any other zones that are triggered while the dialler is on line will not effect the counter When the swinger shutdown count As programmed in LOCATION 662 has been reached all zones that have been triggered will be locked out according to their individual lockout settings If Lockout Daller has been programmed for any zone the last restore signal will not be transmitted until the system or area if partitioned has been disarmed ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Event Timers AT Event Timers 147 Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren LOCATION 662 Software Version 1 40 Only al Location Description 662 Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren 0 15 Table 96 Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren Locations This location determines the amount of times the sirens can be triggered before any lockout options will take effect A minimum of one zone must be programmed for lockout siren for this location to be effective Only alarms triggered from zone inputs will increment the swinger shutdown counter This means alarms such as codepad panic code retries and any other system alarms will not effect the swinger shutdown count While the sirens are operating the counter for the sirens is only incremented by the first zone that caus
218. o Swinger Shutdown Count in LOCATION 662 on page 146 to set the number of times the siren and or dialler will activate before lockout will take effect Solution 16 With Software Version 1 40 Onwards For Solutian 16 control panels with software version 1 40 refer to LOCATION 662 on page 147 to set the number of times the siren will be allowed to activate before it will be locked out and LOCATION 757 on page 147 to set the number of times the dialler will activate before lockout will take effect 4 Silent Alarm A zone programmed to be silent will not trigger the HORN SPEAKER RELAY STROBE or EDMSAT outputs The dialler and all other programmable outputs will function as per their particular programming Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 108 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual 8 Sensor Watch Sensor watch gives the control panel the ability to recognise that detection devices may have stopped working This is a feature that monitors the operation of a zone over a programmed time period Refer to LOCATION 642 643 on page 142 for programming Sensor Watch Time This value determines how many 24 hour periods a zone may remain continuously sealed before it registers as a Sensor Watch fault The number of hours required to fulfil these 24 hour periods is only calculated while the system is in the disarmed state Every time the system is armed the counter pauses calculating Sens
219. o Expansion Board Fitted Eight Zone Expansion Board Fitted If an eight zone expansion board is required to connect the additional zones 9 16 there is a choice of two different zone expansion boards that may be purchased The Eight Zone Expansion Board CC883 can use variable resistor values enabling you to use one EOL resistor value for zones 1 8 and another EOL resistor value for zones 9 16 The Eight Zone Expansion Board CC885 can only be used with a fixed 3K3 EOL resistor value This means that zones 1 8 can have any EOL resistor value from the available options in LOCATION 339 on page 112 and only 3K3 EOL resistors for zones 9 16 2 Eight Channel Output Board Fitted The Eight Channel Output Board CC884 allows the total number of programmable outputs to total 14 The eight channel output board provides terminals for programmable outputs 7 14 Note A plug in Termination Board CC882 is available for the following keyswitch input options 4 Momentary Input For Arm and Disarm A momentary keyswitch may be used to arm and disarm the system in the AWAY Mode via the JP5 pins EXP and GND If the system has been partitioned ALL areas will arm and disarm in the AWAY Mode If Option 8 in LOCATION 665 on page 152 has been enabled the horn speaker will give indication beeps when the system has been armed and disarmed One beep indicates that the system has been disarmed two beeps will indicate that the system has been armed in AWAY
220. o different methods of using answering machine bypass as explained below The secondary method should only be used when there is a large amount of traffic on the line eg A home office It will reduce the chance of the control panel incorrectly answering incoming calls 1 Programming the ring count as 15 will enable Answering Machine Bypass in the primary mode When calling the control panel let the phone ring for no more than 4 rings and then hang up If you call again within 45 seconds the control panel will answer the call on the first ring and the connection will be established This will prevent the answering machine or facsimile from answering the call Refer to LOCATION 664 on page 151 if you wish to enable Answering Machine Bypass Only When System Is Armed 2 From Software Version 1 37 Onwards Programming a 14 as the ring count will enable Answering Machine Bypass in the secondary mode In this mode when calling the control panel allow the phone to ring for no more than 2 rings and then hang up Wait a minimum of 8 seconds before calling the control panel again The control panel will now answer on the first ring If you don t wait the 8 seconds the control panel will not answer the call Refer to LOCATION 664 on page 151 if you wish to enable Answering Machine Bypass Only When System Is Armed Note You should set the ring count on the answering machine or facsimile machine to be higher than two rings Four or six rings wou
221. oard dialler you will need to program Option 1 Disable Safecom Communication Reporting in LOCATION 896 before you power down the system and re apply the power for the on board dialler to operate or have the base station perform a reframe of the Safecom System After you have successfully tested the reporting of the on board dialler you will need to disable Option 1 in LOCATION 896 and then power down the system or have the base station perform a reframe of the Safecom System Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 50 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Master Code Functions Master Code Functions are designed to allow those users that have the appropriate priority level to perform certain functions of a Supervisory level These functions can only be carried out when the system is in the disarmed state Note The default Master Code is and is known as User Code 1 It is possible for the system to have multiple Master Codes Refer to User Code Priority on page 99 for more information MASTER CODE FUNCTION AWAY Function Description Tv Arming and Disarming All Areas At The Same Time Partitioned Systems Only 1 Changing and Deleting User Codes 3 vent Memory Recall Mode SCS al Test Mide Ps Turing Outputs Onand OS e Setting The Date and Time O Oooo l 8 Setting Zones For STAY Mode 2 l Table 18 Master Code Functions 0 Arming and Disarming All Areas At Th
222. odepads allow the user to toggle from one area to another without the need to go to each area codepad Refer to Codepad Connections For Partitioning on page 180 for further information on how to connect these codepads Night Arm Station CP105 The night arm station incorporates a panic button and is designed to allow system operation from a bedroom or sitting room to arm and disarm the system in STAY Mode 1 Phone Controller CC911 The phone controller operates at a frequency of 1400 Hz and allows the user to remotely arm the system in AWAY Mode via the telephone This phone controller can also be used to acknowledge a phone call from the control panel when the system is set up for domestic dialling Hand Held Dialler Tester DD901 The hand held dialler tester simulates a base station for testing of the control panel s dialling functions It communicates in most formats Cellular Dialler The cellular dialler when connected to the control panel will transmit alarm information via the cellular phone network to the base station receiver when a land telephone line is not present or has been tampered with PS100 Power Supply Module PS100 The PS100 Power Supply Module has been designed for applications requiring 13 8 volts DC at currents of up to 1 Amp and must be used in conjunction with the TF008 18 volt AC plug pack The unit comes complete with our standard fully short circuit proof power out and battery charging terminals as
223. odes Zones 1 To 8 Location 474 475 Trouble Codes Zones 9 16 Location 476 479 Codepad Duress Location 480 483 Codepad Panic Location 484 487 Access Denied Code Retries Location 488 491 AC Fail Location 492 495 Low Battery Location 496 499 Program Altered Code Location 500 503 Software Version 1 10 1 31 Only Sensor Trouble Sensor Watch Location 500 503 New Software Version 1 32 Onwards Sensor Trouble Sensor Watch Location 504 505 Open Close Location 506 513 Test Reporting Time Location 514 529 Pager Network Password Location 530 539 Pager ID Number Page 8 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 214 Location 540 623 Output Configurations Output 3 Codepad Output 9 Output 12 Location 552 557 fo 110 2 0 3 Strobe Location 570 575 0 12 2 1 0 1 Location 588 593 s 3f s 1 o Output 10 Location 606 611 Gldefzldal o sfsfo ls Output I Output 7 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Location 540 545 Location 558 563 Location 576 581 Location 594 599 Location 612 617 Page 125 Location 546 551 ofofolofofo 2 lofolofofofo Location 564 569 afolrfofolo e frsfrfofofo Location 582 587 s12 6 3 1 o gung sl2l6 3 6 0 Location 600 605 5 s sfelo mmm japel ra Location 618 623 ome DELT Location 62
224. of a true burglary Once the control panel detects that the phone line has stopped ringing it immediately loops the line and makes its call therefore transmitting its alarm message successfully The line is also automatically disconnected from the telephones within the protected premises immediately on an alarm condition by the control panel to further confuse the burglar and eliminate the possibility of the burglar answering the call As you can see our method of anti jamming will in the worst possible case delay the alarm signal by ninety seconds but even more importantly will never allow for an audio connection between the burglar and the control panel All dialling products produced by Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited have incorporated this true anti jamming feature as standard since 1985 and we do not consider it as an option but a must in any professional security system True anti jamming can only be found in products produced by Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited and any other manufacturer can only offer second best due to our patent on this very unique and effective procedure ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Appendices 205 Appendix B Test Reports Only When Armed The Solutian 16 control panel allows for test reports to be transmitted to the base station receiver to verify that the dialler functional So what you might say as most alarm diallers allow you to do this The
225. ogram Entry Exit Timers e Entry Timer 1 e Entry Timer 2 e Entry Timer 3 e Entry Timer 4 e Exit Timer For AWAY Mode e Exit Timer For STAY Mode 1 e Exit Timer For STAY Mode 2 Entry Guard Timer For STAY Mode e Codepad Lockout Time e Sensor Watch Time e Safecom RF Jamming Delay e System Date e Auto Arming e Auto Arming Pre Alert Timer e Auto Operation Pre Alert Timer e Auto Operation Of The Timed Output e Siren Run Time e Siren Sound Rate e Swinger Shutdown Count e Swinger Shutdown Count For Siren e Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler e System Time 140 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual System Event Timers This section covers the features that involve timing Features such as entry and exit times sensor watch time siren run time and system date and time along with a host of other timers are discussed extensively in this section How To Program Entry Exit Timers There are two locations to be programmed for Entry Timer 1 Entry Timer 2 Exit Time For AWAY Mode Exit Time For STAY Mode 1 STAY Mode 2 and Entry Guard Time For STAY Mode The first location of the timer is for programming increments of between 0 15 seconds The second location of the timer is for programming increments of 16 seconds By adding these two locations together will give the total time required Entry Time The Solutian 16 control panel has four separate entry timers Entry time can be programmed between 0 and 255 seconds
226. on Setting Up An Area 3 Codepad If you wish to have a separate area codepad only for Area 3 when using the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad as the main codepad you will need to connect the Area 3 codepad to the main codepad terminals GND 12V amp CLK with the DATA terminal to be connected to one of the programmable outputs programmed as 6 2 Area 3 Codepad Data DIP switch 1 and 2 on the back of the Area 3 codepad will need to be in the on position Setting Up An Area 4 Codepad If you wish to have a separate area codepad only for Area 4 when using the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad as the main codepad you will need to connect the Area 4 codepad to the main codepad terminals GND 12V amp CLK with the DATA terminal to be connected to one of the programmable outputs programmed as 6 3 Area 4 Codepad Data DIP switch 3 on the back of the Area 4 codepad will need to be in the on position DIP Switches R22 LO R19 Area 1 S1 nN CR SL a Area 2 S2 on ER NK Area 3 S1 S2 on Ego Area 4 S3 on gt T E Lu Qn YE Ex N Ee a ARE Ga OF 0 0 m ES O Lo RIT Riz Blk Red e El Figure 8 D AREA Codepad DIP Switch Settings Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 180 Codepad Connections For Partitioning 34 NOLLYIO 1 e1Lno OVS NOILVDOT1 LLNO 6SS 9 899 NOILVOO1 PLNO Ate 9
227. on 750 Areas For User 27 Location 754 Areas For User 31 H Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Location 731 Areas For User 8 o Location 735 Areas For User 12 Location 739 Areas For User 1 60 Location 743 Areas For User 20 0 Location 747 Areas For User 24 0 Location 751 Areas For User 28 Location 755 Areas For User wel ISSUE210 DOC 218 Solution 16 Solutiaon 16 Safecom Installation Manual Location 756 Page 89 ii 1 300 Baud Printer Output Baud Rate Ee 3 1200 Baud 4 2400 Baud 2 Location 757 New Software Version 14 40 Page 147 Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler H Location 760 763 New Software Version 2001 Page 121 H Location 758 Event Code Hundreds Digit Safecom RF Fail Location 759 Event Code Tens Digit Location 764 767 New Software Version 2 00 Safecom Telco Fail Location 760 Event Code Units Digit Location 761 Dialler Channel DEA Location 764 Event Code Hundreds Digit Location 765 Event Code Tens Digit Location 766 Event Code Units Digit Location 767 Dialler Channel 315 Safecom RF Jamming Location 768 771 New Software Version 2 00 Page 121 Location 764 Event Code Hundreds Digit Location 765 Event Code Tens Digit Location 766 Event Code Units Digit Location 767 Dialler Channel DDDD Location 772 New Software Version 2 00 Onwards Page 142 Safecom RF Jamming Del
228. on Of The Timed Output 145 Siren RE 145 Siren Sound EE 145 Swinger Shutdown Count seiersen aid 146 Swinger Shutdown Count For Sen 147 Swinger Shutdown Count For Dialler ss eeren mne a a a E e i a a a o E Taa 147 System A e a ae 148 Setting The Date apd Time ui A diia 148 OPTION BITS E 150 RI Options irene tt E ML oh cto Mine eo mess ES Ste ive dec kd ei de Ad tea Shee tah oS 150 Dialer Options Zi A AAA dann pune Oe A da 151 SIE OOO di A nea ise 152 System Options Zi A ce Ada NEEE EEE EE EEE Sesdab decease bebsuectoueeeneslaeese 153 DS YSteMMOPtiONS GE 154 System Options tl 155 NI ege ele peer eee 156 Consumer Options di aiii 157 Consumer E E EE e A o O Ad 158 Consumer Options Li A SE Eege 159 DTME Command Module Options iii esas Bee eo a soa SIE SS 160 Expansion Board Tip ide 161 Expo Ba A BAY aia 162 Telephone Line Fault Options aia 164 e ee RRE 165 System Options EE 165 System Options EE 166 Carrier Syne BT 167 PARTITIONIN socia ld Eed edd eaten eda aca N T 170 Master Partitioned Codepad Indicators eet O E EEN ee 170 Long Indicators it SS A AAA RA 170 Zo Areas On OFF Indicators Ae ee leed Ee Eed ere ic 170 3 Area Display Indicators ii deed EE 170 4 Status IndicatOr iii dal di ae 170 Operating Codepads Tn Partitioming id iii 171 Operating From A CP5 Area Addressable CP500A Codenad non ncnncnnnnnnnnnnnns 171 Operating From A CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P Codepad cccecessesseeseeeseeee
229. onal and needs to be enabled in LOCATION 670 on page 159 Note Single button arming in STAY Mode 1 will report as user code number 32 Method One How To Arm The System In STAY Mode 1 1 Enter your cone followed by the STAY button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY indicator will illuminate Exit time for STAY Mode 1 will now commence Any zones that have been programmed for STAY Mode 1 will be automatically isolated and their respective indicators will begin to flash until exit time expires At the end of exit time the ZONE indicators will extinguish and the codepad will give one short beep CODE J STAY Method Two How To Arm The System In STAY Mode 1 1 Hold down the stay J button until two beeps are heard The STAY indicator will illuminate and exit time for STAY Mode 1 will now commence Any zone that have been programmed for STAY Mode 1 will be automatically isolated and their respective indicators will begin to flash until exit time expires At the end of exit time the zone indicators will extinguish and the codepad will give one short beep STAY If a zone is not sealed at the end of exit time the zone will be automatically isolated It will become an active part of the system again as soon as it has resealed ie If a window is left open after exit time has expired the window will not be an active part of the system until it has closed Opening the window after exit time has expired will cause an alarm
230. or watch will continue calculating the next time the system has been disarmed Example If the Sensor Watch Time is programmed for two days in a situation where a premises is armed for twelve hours and disarmed for twelve hours each day it will take four days before a zone can register as a faulty sensor watch zone Zone Pulse Count Zone pulse count is the number of times a zone must be triggered before the zone registers as an alarm The number of pulses vary between 0 15 The zone pulse count value is relative to a time frame ie The number of pulses must be present during a particular time frame Refer to Table 51 Zone Pulse Count Times on page 109 for time frame settings Option Number Of Pulses Option Number Of Pulses ESAS O RO E a Table 50 Number Of Pulses Zone pulse count does not effect the LED indicators on a codepad The triggering of a zone will always illuminate the respective indicator but an alarm condition will not occur until the total number of pulses has been reached A zone programmed as a day alarm zone is not effected by any pulse count setting 1e Pulse count is only relevant when the system is in the armed state Note A pulse count of zero disables both the zone pulse count and zone pulse count time The zone will cause an alarm as soon as it becomes unsealed The loop response time in this instance defaults to 150 ms ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone Programm
231. ormat 478 Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or Channel Location For All Other Formats 479 Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 or 4 Table 59 Codepad Duress Locations A Duress report Contact ID Event Code 121 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the j button is added to the end of any valid user code being used to disarm the system This alarm will always be silent A duress alarm can be triggered during exit time ie If the system has been armed and then disarmed by adding the j button to the end of the user code before exit time has expired a Duress report will be transmitted Adding 9 to the end of a user code when arming the system will not cause a duress alarm Note Restore signals are not transmitted for this event If a Duress report is not required program the dialler channel LOCATION 479 with a zero ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Status Information 117 LOCATION 480 483 DDR Location Description Contact ID Event Code Hundreds Digit Contact ID Event Code Tens Digit Or 2 483 Alarm Or Expansion Digit In 4 2 Format Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or Channel Location For All Other Formats 483 Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 0r4 Table 60 Codepad Panic Locations Software Version 1 10 1 36 A Panic Alarm report Contact ID Event Code 120 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when any two outside b
232. ote codepad when the system has been disarmed If this option has not been enabled the system will need to be armed and disarmed again to clear alarm memory from the remote codepad Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 160 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual DTMF Command Module Options LOCATION 671 Lo Description Enable Access Into Installer s Programming Mode Enable Access To Installer Code Functions Enable Disarming Of System Via User Codes 8 Auxiliary Code Operations Enable Access To Master Code Functions Table 111 DTMF Command Module Options The DTMF Command Module CC886 must be fitted to the COMMAND MODULE socket on the Solutian 16 printed circuit board to enable access to any of these features via a touch tone telephone Caution must be exercised when using this feature as there is no visual feedback for confirmation Refer to Operating The Control Panel Using The DTMF Command Module on page 67 for more information Enable Access Into Installer s Programming Mode If this option has been selected access into Installer s Programming Mode will be allowed via any touch tone telephone Programming of any location except for LOCATION 900 may now take place 2 Enable Access To Installer Code Functions If this option has been selected Installer Code Functions may be performed via any touch tone telephone 4 Enable Arming and Disarming Of System Via On O
233. ou require an AC Loss report to be transmitted to the base station receiver when the AC mains supply has been disconnected for 1 hour enable Option 4 in LOCATION 667 on page 154 A restore signal will be transmitted when the AC mains has been reconnected for two minutes If you wish to ignore AC fail enable Option 4 in LOCATION 668 on page 156 Note If an AC Loss report is not required program the dialler channel in LOCATION 491 with a zero ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Status Information 119 Low Battery LOCATION 492 495 sojo Location Description Contact ID Event Code Hundreds Digit 493 Contact ID Event Code Tens Digit Or Alarm Or Expansion Digit In 4 2 Format Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or Channel Location For All Other Formats Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 or 4 Table 63 Low Battery Locations A Battery Test Failure report Contact ID Event Code 309 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the systems battery voltage falls below 10 5 volts or when a dynamic battery test detects a low capacity battery The control panel continually monitors the battery voltage Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 42 A dynamic battery test is performed every time the system or an area has been armed as well as every four hours from power up of the control panel A Low Battery Restore signal will be transmitted if the back up battery h
234. ow been set up for Domestic Dialling Format 3 Enable Synthesised Voice Format by programming LOCATION 050 as 15 4 Exit Installer s Programming Mode by entering Command efe followed by the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish 5 To program your telephone numbers enter the master cope followed by D and the away button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Refer to Master Code Functions on page 50 for more information If there are telephone numbers already programmed they will be displayed one digit at a time via the ZONE indicators on the codepad If there are no previous programmed telephone numbers a further two beeps will be heard after entering this mode These two beeps are normally heard after the last digit of the last telephone number has been displayed 6 Enter all the digits for PHONENo 1 one digit at a time You will notice as each digit is entered the corresponding codepad indicators will illuminate 7 After you have entered all the digits of the first telephone number press the stay button if there is more than one phone number This will insert a break between the first telephone number and the second telephone number If there is only one phone number press the AWAY button to exit this mode 8 Enter all the digits for PHONE No 2 one digit at a time You will notice as each digit is entered the correspon
235. p every time a zone is sealed or unsealed 3 Press the AWAY button to exit this mode Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish MASTER CODE 4 AWAY ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 5 System Functions 57 Turning Outputs On and Off If an output has been programmed for remote operation via the telephone or to automatically turn on at a particular time it can be turned on and off using this Master Code Function via the remote codepad over the telephone via the DTMF Command Module or the Alarm Link Software How To Turn An Output ON From The Remote Codepad Enter your master cope followed by D and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Enter the required OUTPUT no followed by the Away button Three beeps will be heard and the output will now turn on Repeat step 2 if more than one output is required to be turned on Press the Away button again to exit this mode Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish MASTER CODE 5 away OUTPUT No away away Output Number 1 Output Event Type 2 8 Refer to page 131 Output Number 2 Output Event Type 2 9 Refer to page 131 Output Number 3 Output Event Type 2 10 Refer to page 131 Output Number 4 Output Event Type 2 11 Refer to page 131 Output Number 5 Output
236. p flashing when all zones are sealed The ON icon will illuminate when the system is armed in the AWAY mode and will flash when an alarm occurs The indicator will reset once a valid user code has been entered Table 12 ICON Indicators and Descriptions Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Indicators and Operations 35 System Operations Arming The System In AWAY Mode There are two methods for arming your system in the AWAY Mode Method one is standard and will always operate Method two is optional and requires to be enabled in LOCATION 670 on page 159 Note Single button arming in AWAY Mode will report as user code number 32 Method One How To Arm The System In AWAY Mode 1 Enter your CODE followed by the AWAY button Two beeps will be heard and the AWAY indicator will illuminate Exit time will now begin CODE AWAY Method Two How To Arm The System In AWAY Mode 1 Hold down the away button until two beeps are heard The AWAY indicator will illuminate and exit time will now begin Refer to Option 2 in LOCATION 670 on page 159 to enable Enable Single Button Arming In AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 AWAY If a zone is not sealed at the end of exit time the zone will be automatically isolated It will become an active part of the system again as soon as it has resealed ie If a window is left open after exit time has expired the window will not be an active part of the
237. p only After the last event three beeps will be heard to indicate the end of playback The replay can be terminated at any time by pressing the AWAY button Note If the control panel has been powered down the memory of all events will be lost Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 48 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual 4 Walk Test Mode Walk test mode allows you to test detection devices to ensure that they are functioning correctly Before activating walk test mode isolate any zones that are not required for testing Refer to Isolating Zones on page 41 for further information How To Enter Walk Test Mode 1 Enter the vsTaLter cove followed by Al and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash The codepad will beep once every second while the system is in the walk test mode 2 Unseal and seal the zones to be tested The codepad will sound a long beep while the horn speaker will sound a short beep every time a zone is sealed or unsealed 3 Press the AWAY button to exit this mode Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish INSTALLER CODE db Al AWAY 5 Satellite Siren Service Mode If an EDMSAT is connected to Output 1 this mode will allow you to perform service work on the satellite siren without triggering the siren or the strobe The unit will return to its normal working state t
238. port to a PET Alpha Pocket Pager Protocol using the BELL frequency Connection Ensure that all power is disconnected from the Salutian 16 control panel Locate the AUXILIARY MODULE socket on the printed circuit board and connect the modem module ensuring that the orientation of the triangular markings on the printed circuit board correspond to those on the modem module Voice Module CC888 The voice module has been designed so that a clear concise voice message can be transmitted by the control panel to the domestic phone numbers of your choice when an alarm condition occurs This allows the person receiving the call to easily understand that the control panel at your home or office has been activated and that action is required This voice message is pre recorded by the installer and can be changed as many times as necessary The message can be any length between 1 16 seconds Refer to Synthesised Voice Reporting on page 80 for more information ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Optional Equipment 185 Telephone Line Fault Module CC887 This module is used to monitor the existence of the telephone line connected to the control panel There are a number of options for the different type of indications available when a line fault has been detected Refer to LOCATION 673 on page 164 for the different options available DTMF Command Module CC886 This module is required to be connected to the control
239. r All Other Formats 767 Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 or 4 ERE Point ID 49 Decimal Telco Fail report Contact ID Event Code 351 will be transmitted via the Safecom network when the telephone line is disconnected This will only be reported if you are using a Telephone Line Fault Module CC887 with Location 673 programmed with a 7 Safecom RF Jamming LOCATION 768 771 BER Safecom Only Location Description 768 Contact ID Event Code Hundreds Digit 768 769 Contact ID Event Code Tens Digit Or Alarm Or Expansion Digit In 4 2 Format 71 770 Contact ID Event Code Units Digit Or Channel Location For All Other Formats 7 Dialler Channel Dialler Channel 1 2 3 or 4 Point ID 50 RF Jamming report Contact ID Event Code 344 will be transmitted when the safecom interface detects carrier for more than the specified period which is determined by the RF Jamming Delay feature in location 772 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 122 Solution 16 Solutiaon 16 Safecom Installation Manual Test Reports LOCATION 506 513 ololololololalal Location Description 510 512 1 513 510 Repeat Interval In Days Tens Da 512 Expansion Code For 4 2 Format 513 Test Report Options S O Table 67 Test Report Locations A Test report Contact ID Event Code 602 is a specific signal that is transmitted to the base station receiver and is normally us
240. r Siren Reset Enabling this option will force the control panel to transmit a test report after the siren has reset This can be used to indicate to the monitoring station that the control panel has not been tampered with during the alarm period 2 Enable Control Panel To Power Up In Disarmed State If this option has been enabled the control panel will power up in the disarmed state once the battery and AC mains have been reconnected once the system has been powered down EDM does not recommend this feature 4 Enable Internal Crystal To Keep Time New Software Version 1 40 Onwards If this option has been enabled it will force the control panel not to use the mains frequency as a time base to keep time The control panel will use the internal crystal XTAL to keep track of time This option is useful in countries that do not have a constant mains frequency Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 166 Solution 16 Solutiaon 16 Safecom Installation Manual System Options 6 LOCATION 898 New From Software Version 1 33 Onwards 3 Description Enable Busy Tone Detection For Domestic Dialling Enable Kiss Off Detection For Domestic Dialling Extend Acknowledge Tone Detection From 30 60 Seconds ME If Battery Fails Enable Dynamic Battery Test Only On Arming New Software Version 1 35 Table 115 System Options 6 Enable Busy Tone Detection For Domestic Dialling This option is valid on
241. ramming key and then altering any location will cause a simultaneous update of not only the programming keys data but also the control panels data Therefore you are not able to alter data in the programming key without the same location being altered in the control panels memory Note Connecting a Programming Key CC891 to the control panel when the programming keys memory is blank will corrupt the control panel s memory unless the Installer s Programming Mode has been entered first If this occurs then the control panel will need to be returned to Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited where a service fee will be charged to unlock the control panel s memory Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 22 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Programming V a The DTMF Command Module The DTMF Command Module CC886 will allow you to operate and program your control panel remotely via the telephone line Once a communications link has been established with the control panel you will be able to perform any system functions using the codepad on a touch tone telephone for Master Code User Code and Installer Code Functions as well as access into Installer s Programming Mode Below will give an example of making a connection to the control panel and changing the Exit Time for AWAY Mode to 26 seconds on a non partitioned system To connect to a system which has been partitioned refer to Operat
242. rea LOCATION 338 e Code retries restricts the amount of times an invalid user code can be used in an attempt to operate the system This location sets the number of incorrect code attempts that will cause an alarm condition When the number of incorrect code attempts equals the number programmed in this location the system will carry out the following 1 Activate the sirens internal screamers and strobes connected to the control panel Refer to LOCATION 666 on page 153 to enable Access Denied To Be Silent 2 Shutdown all codepads Including CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepads and CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepads that are connected to the control panel and lock them out for the time period programmed in LOCATION 640 641 on page 142 3 Transmit an Access Denied Contact ID Event Code 421 report to the base station receiver Refer to LOCATION 484 487 on page 118 for more information Each time the system is armed or disarmed the counter is reset The number of attempts can be anywhere between 1 15 If you program a zero into this location the code attempts are unlimited and neither of the three points listed above will take place This function works when the system is in the armed or disarmed state Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 102 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone P
243. rea 3 LOCATION 684 687 olololal Location Description Table 124 Area 3 Subscriber ID Number Locations Subscriber ID Number For Area 4 LOCATION 688 691 olololal Location Description Area 4 Subscriber ID Number Thousands Digit Area 4 Subscriber ID Number Tens Digit Area 4 Subscriber ID Number Units Digit Table 125 Area 4 Subscriber ID Number Locations Area 4 Subscriber ID Number Hundreds Digit Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 176 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual Zone Allocations Each area can have up to eight zones allocated to 1t The eight locations for each area represent ZONE indicators one to eight on the remote codepad Any of the zone inputs 1 15 can be mapped to any area to appear as any zone on the remote codepad ie Any zone from 1 15 can be common to as many areas as required Common zones report to the base station receiver on group zero Zones that are specific to one area will report on the corresponding group number Zone 16 is common to all areas and cannot be mapped to an individual area It is ideally suited as a 24 hour burglary or fire zone If zone 16 has been programmed as an instant zone it will become active as soon as any area has been armed When zone 16 has triggered the AUX indicator on a CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad will illuminate or if an CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad has been used zone 16 wil
244. rens or dialler to operate once When the system is next armed the zone can cause the sirens and dialler to operate once more As can be seen by Table 49 Zone Options the sirens can be locked out but still leave the dialler to transmit all reports to the base station receiver by programming Zone Option 1 Programming Zone Option 2 will lockout the dialler but leave the sirens to be reset Programming Zone Option 3 ie 1 2 3 will lockout both the sirens and dialler Restore signals will be transmitted when the system has been disarmed The Salutian 16 control panel performs lockout different to most other control panels in that only the first zone to trigger an alarm condition will be locked out All other zones that are triggered during the same siren run time will reset when the sirens reset This prevents an intruder from triggering all zones then waiting for the sirens to stop before re entering the premises Example All zones are programmed for both lockout siren and dialler Zone 1 is triggered followed by all other zones causing the sirens to sound and the dialler to report to the base station receiver Zone 1 will be the only zone that stops reporting to the base station receiver because of the first zone to trigger is locked out The remaining zones will continue to report if they are triggered again Solution 16 With Software Version 1 10 1 37 For Solutianm 16 control panels with software version 1 10 1 37 refer t
245. ritel and Partitioning Programming Open Close Reports Subscriber ID Number Zone Allocations User Code Allocations Setting Up and Programming Codepads For Partitioning Codepad Connections For Partitioning 170 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual Partitioning Partitioning allows a single control panel to act as if it were four different control panels There is a CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad that has indicators to show the status of all areas individually If you wish to allocate each area a separate codepad the CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad must be used This will give the user the impression that they are the only operator of the system Solucion Solution STAY MAINS FAULT AWAY Figure 5 CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P Codepad Figure 6 CP5 Area Addressable CP500A 4 Codepad If the control panel has been partitioned you can have a maximum of four areas Each area can have up to a maximum of 8 zones Zones may be shared between areas to act as common zones Zone 16 cannot be allocated to an area and will be indicated when triggered by the AUX indicator on the CP5 Master Partitioned CP500P codepad or the FAULT indicator on CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad It would then be recommended to program Zone 16 to operate as a 24 hour zone and common to all areas Master Partitioned Codepad Indicators The indicators on a CP5 Master Partitioned
246. rmats available Refer to LOCATION 050 on page 94 to set the required transmission format The Solutian 16 control panel comes factory default to report in the Contact ID Format Contact ID Format This format can identify hundreds of protection zones by their unique code and provides a single digit event qualifier and a three digit event code that quickly identifies the condition being reported Subscriber ID Number Qualifier Event Code Group Number Point ID Number EN CA MEE Gee Ul Four Digit Event Qualifier Which Gives Event Code Group Number Point ID Number Subscriber ID Specific Event Information Made Up Of 3 Made Up Of 2 Made Up Of 3 Number 1 New Event Or Opening Hex Digits Hex Digits Hex Digits 3 New Restore Or Closing Table 26 Contact ID Format Breakdown In general Contact ID reporting format is very simple as most of the Event Codes and Point ID Codes have been predefined The Event Code is programmable whereas the Point ID Codes are fixed The base station software usually only has the ability to identify a zone going into alarm by its Point ID Code and usually pays little attention to the Event Code Refer to Table 28 Point ID Codes on page 74 for further information on the Salutian 14 Point ID Codes and Table 27 Contact ID Event Codes on page 73 for the list of Event Codes that are supported by the control panel ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Reporting Formats 73
247. rn speaker will give indication beeps when the system has been armed and disarmed One beep indicates that the system has been disarmed two beeps will indicate that the system has been armed in AWAY Mode ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 4 10 11 12 Option Bits 163 Latching Input For Arm and Disarm A toggle or latching keyswitch may be used to arm and disarm the system in the AWAY Mode via the JP5 pins EXP and GND If the system has been partitioned ALL areas will arm and disarm in the AWAY Mode If Option 8 in LOCATION 665 on page 152 has been enabled the horn speaker will give indication beeps when the system has been armed and disarmed One beep indicates that the system has been disarmed two beeps will indicate that the system has been armed in AWAY Mode Momentary Arm In AWAY Mode A momentary keyswitch may be used to arm the system in the AWAY Mode via the JP5 pins EXP and GND If the system has been partitioned ALL areas will arm in the AWAY Mode Horn speaker indication beeps do not function for the option type Momentary Arm In STAY Mode 1 A momentary keyswitch may be used to arm the system in the STAY Mode 1 via the JP5 pins EXP and GND If the system has been partitioned this option will not operate Horn speaker indication beeps do not function for the option type Momentary Arm In STAY Mode 2 A momentary keyswitch may be used to arm the system in the STAY Mode 2 via the JP5 p
248. rogrammed zone type Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 142 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual Codepad Lockou t Time LOCATION 640 641 ojoj Location Description 1 Second Increments For Codepad Lockout Time 16 Second Increments For Codepad Lockout Time Table 83 Codepad Lockout Timer Locations All codepads will be locked out for the specified time programmed if the wrong code has been entered more times than allowed by the code retry attempts in LOCATION 338 on page 101 If the Codepad Lockout Time is programmed as zero no lockout will occur le Sensor Watch Time fofo LOCATION 642 643 e Location Description Number Of Days Tens Digit Number Of Days Units Digit Table 84 Sensor Watch Timer Locations The time set in these two locations determines how many days 0 99 a zone may remain sealed before registering as a fault This feature is only active when the system is in the disarmed state If a zone programmed for sensor watch has not triggered and reset during this time the FAULT indicator will illuminate Refer to Fault Descriptions on page 42 for further information on sensor watch faults Safecom RF Jamming Delay LOCATION 772 Lo Safecom Only Location Description 772 Increments of Minutes 0 15 minutes Table 85 RF Jamming Delay Time This is used to set the amount of time that the safecom interface detects continuous s
249. rogramming This Section Includes The Following Zone Programming Zone Operating Information Zone Reporting Information Zone Defaults Zone Options Zone Pulse Count Zone Pulse Count Handover Zone Pulse Count Time Day Alarm Day Alarm Resetting Day Alarm Latching Day Alarm Operation Day Alarm In Partitioning EOL Resistor Value 104 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual Zone Programming Each zone contains eight locations that are divided into two groups of four The first four locations determine how the zone operates while the second four locations contain the dialler reporting information Zone Operating Information Zone Type This location programs the Zone Type required eg Delay 1 Instant 24 Hour etc Zone Option This location controls the zone eg Lockout Siren Silent etc Zone Pulse Count This location sets how many times the zone must trigger within the time specified in the Zone Pulse Count Time Zone Pulse Count Time This parameter sets the time period for the number of times the zone must trigger before activating an alarm Zone Reporting Information Hundreds Digit The hundreds digit of the Contact ID Event Code is programmed into this location This location is also the Alarm Restore code in all other reporting formats Refer to Event Codes on Page 73 Tens Digit The tens digit of the Contact ID Event Code is programmed into this location This location is the
250. rs Zone Zone 2 Zone 3 Zone 4 Zone 5 Zone 6 Zone 7 Zone 8 MAINS Digit Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Number Y Y Separator Table 20 Indicators For Changing Phone Numbers ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 3 System Functions 55 Event Memory Recall Mode This feature allows you to playback the last forty events that have occurred to the system The event memory recall mode reports all alarms and arming disarming of the system in the STAY or AWAY Modes This function helps with trouble shooting system faults The events are displayed via the codepad indicators How To Enter The Event Memory Recall Mode 1 Enter your master cope followed by Al and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard The events will be played back via the ZONE indicators on the codepad in reverse chronological order MASTER CODE 3 AWAY If the system has been partitioned only the last ten events will be recorded for each of the four areas You will be required to enter this mode at each of the four areas Example If the events were as follows Event No Description Of Event System Armed In AWAY Mode Alarm In Zone 3 Alarm In Zone 4 System Disarmed Table 21 Event Memory Recall Example Events The event memory playback will report as follows Event No Codepad Indicator Event Description All Indicators Off Excep
251. s New Software Version 1 37 This output will function during all remote radio keyswitch operations allowing you to fit a 12V DC buzzer or light to provide status indication for the end user Option 8 in LOCATION 665 on page 152 is not required to be enabled for this event type to operate Refer to Table 69 Horn Speaker Beeps for the identification beeps and their meanings No Of Beeps System Status System Disarmed System Armed In AWAY Mode System Armed In STAY Mode 1 Table 69 Horn Speaker Beeps Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC lo KI o E E E el Je la E la Solution 16 Solution 16 Safecom Installation Manual Sirens Running This output will operate for the duration of the siren run time programmed in LOCATION 660 on page 145 When the sirens have been activated this output will reset once the siren run time has expired Strobe Operating This output will operate when an alarm condition occurs and will reset once a valid user code has been entered or when the system is next armed or disarmed Silent Alarm This output will operate whenever a zone programmed as silent has triggered The output will reset when the siren run time expires an audible alarm has triggered or a valid user code has been entered Alarm When In STAY Mode This output will operate whenever an audible or silent zone alarm has triggered when the system has been armed in S
252. s 164 Telephone Line Fault Module 185 Telephone Monitor Mode 49 Terminal Definitions and Descriptions ooo o 192 Termination Block For JP5 Pins CC882 185 Test Programming Ken 24 TEST REP OLS ees ontario aiii 122 A e EEN ANE 64 On All Active Diallers Partitioning o 122 Only When Amen 122 205 Send After Siren Reset 165 Set First Test Report 46 TFO008 Plug Pack 186 Transmission Format 94 Transmission Speed 95 Trouble Reports econo 115 U Upload Download Call Back Telephone Number oooonconcnnonnoonconncononnnos 93 Direct Connect 69 Enable recodo alias 150 Remote Connettiti ninii 70 Remote Connect With Callback Verification 70 Remote Connect With Customer Control 70 Remote Connect Without Callback Verification 70 Terminate On Alarm 150 User Code Function ISSUE210 DOC 226 Arm Disarm All Areas At Same Time 0008 60 User CodeS it as 98 A ENNEN dE 51 Allocanons re 178 Auxilia ia 52 101 De io 52 Priority Level circos EeNEEER aida 99 H Voice Moduler anuari RENE EE 184 Connectnon nono nncnnn nono nono nnonnnnos 83 OPeration i532 en Reser heel eee Heke ee el 82 Recording Message 82 Replaying Message 82 W Walk Testi tds tit 48 56 Warranty Statement 208 Wiring Diagram cceceeceesseesseeseeseesseeseeeseeeeeeseeaes 194 Z Zone AIO CAH EEN 176 Bypass Repsol SEENEN 114 IER EK UC 104 Dialler Chan
253. s 2 l Enable User Code 0 AWAY Function To Arm Disarm All Areas If this option has been selected it will allow the user code holder to arm disarm all areas at the same time without the need to enter the user code at each area codepad Refer to Master Code Functions on page 50 and User Code Function on page 60 for more information If the user code holder arms all areas at the same time if in LOCATION 664 on page 151 has the option First To Open Last To Close Reporting enabled only a closing report for the last area will be reported If the user code holder disarms all areas at the same time if in LOCATION 664 on page 151 has the option First To Open Last To Close Reporting enabled only an opening report for the first area will be reported 2 Enable Single Button Arming In AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 If this option has been selected the hold down functions for arming in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 will be functional Refer to Hold Down Functions on page 61 for more information 4 Enable Single Button Disarming From STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 This option will only operate when Option 2 in LOCATION 670 on page 159 has been enabled This option will enable hold down functions for disarming from STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 Refer to Hold Down Functions on page 61 for more information 8 Enable Alarm Memory Reset On Disarm This option allows the memory of alarm events to be cleared from the rem
254. s Digit Day Of The Month Units Digit 646 Month Of The Year Tens Digit Month Of The Year Units Digit Current Year Tens Digit 649 Current Year Units Digit Table 87 System Date Locations Software Version 1 20 1 40 LOCATION 644 649 Software Version 1 10 Only JJ ejs Location Description Current Year Tens Digit Current Year Units Digit Day Of The Month Units Digit i Table 88 System Date Locations Software Version 1 10 Only Solution 146 has a real time 12 month calendar that needs to be set during installation Setting The Date and Time This function needs to be used when the date and time requires to be changed or the system has been powered down How To Set The New Date and Time 1 Enter your master cope followed by D and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash Ze Enter the day month year hour and minute using the DD MM YY HH MM format 3 Press the AWAY button when finished Two beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish MASTER CODE 6 AWAY Example If the date and time needs to be set for the 1st January 1996 at 10 00 PM program the date and time as follows MASTER CODE el away 0 4 0 4 e 6 2 2 0 0 away Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 144 Solu
255. s Runmng nanei nei 130 Speaker EE 129 Strobe OperatidB oooooconccionononconnconcconoonnconnnnnnconocnnnoo 130 System Armei 127 System Disarmed coooooconnccnocononononconnconconnconncnnnnanncnnooo 127 Telephone Line Faute 131 Timed Output seed 128 Zone Not Sealed oooooncconncnnocnocncococonononconcconocononnnonnss 132 Zone Not Sealed After Exit Time 0ooooooncnnnnnicnnonnoo 132 Outputs Automatic Operations Time 145 Detalla eles ee 125 Event TYPOS e a na 127 One Shot Polartw ea 137 Polarity A nn 134 CINC 145 Pulsing Polarities oooooonnnnnnnionononconnconnonncnnnonnnonnonnos 136 Redirecting To Codepad Buzzer 126 TIMO As 136 Toggle On Off Via Master Code 57 P Panic AO ca 40 ME a 153 Panie Reporta ia 117 PARTIAL Indicator oooocccicnnocnnocononcnnnconnconccnnncnncnnnnnos 171 Partitioning cccceesceeseessceseeeeeeseceseeseeeseeeeenseenseeaes 170 Allow Resetting Of Sirens From All Areas 155 156 Area 1 Codepad As Main Codepad ocoooccnncccoccnonoono 179 Area 1 Codepad Setup oooooooonocnconnconononcnnncnnncnnncnnnnns 179 Area 2 Codepad Setup ooooonoonocnnocnconononcnnnonnncnnncnnnnns 179 Area 3 Codepad Setup ooooooconocnconoconononcnnnconcconccnnnnns 179 Area 4 Codepad Setup ooooooonnccncocnconononcnnnonnnonnncnnnnns 179 Area Addressable Codepad Operations 171 Arm Disarm All Areas At Same Time oooonnonnccnn 159 Connecting Codepads ooooooconoccnocononcoonconnconccancnnonnss 180 Master
256. s also received This is like talking on a phone handset and hearing yourself talk When two modems are connected they exchange tones with each other that allows them to communicate with one another The sync tone a modem sends to another modem is called a carrier Generally to remain in sync each modem must receive the other modems carrier If a carrier has been lost some modems initiate an error correction algorithm Because the Solutian 16 control panel does not have a 2 wire to 4 wire converter the control panel must stop sending its carrier to the remote modem when it receives data When it is time to send data again it reapplies the carrier before sending data Some modems unfortunately do not synchronise as quickly as other modems Remember a modem must be synchronised before receiving data The time it takes a modem to sync varies from modem to modem Some modems may only want a carrier for 100 ms while others may require a carrier for 900 ms LOCATION 899 specifies in units of 100 ms how long the Sofutian 16 control panel should apply a carrier before commencing data transmissions Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 168 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Partitioning This Section Includes The Following Partitioning Master Partitioned Codepad Indicators Operating Codepads In Partitioning Secu
257. s have been disarmed Output Event Type 5 15 will operate when any area becomes disarmed if the control panel has been partitioned The output will reset when all areas have been armed Area 1 Codepad Data e 2 Area 3 Codepad Data Area 2 Codepad Data 6 3 Area 4 Codepad Data If the control panel has been partitioned CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepads are required to be connected to separate outputs and programmed for the required area that the codepad belongs to Refer to Codepad Connections For Partitioning on page 180 for further information on connecting the CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepads to the control panel Example If the Area 1 codepad is to be connected to Output 2 you would then set DIP Switch 1 on the back of the CP5 Area Addressable CP500A codepad into the ON position For the Area 1 codepad to communicate to and from the control panel Output 2 will need to be programmed with Output Event Type 6 0 Only Outputs 1 4 on the control panel can be used for these output event types The 8 Channel Output Expansion Board CC884 cannot be used for these output event types Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 134 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual Output Polarity Software Version 1 20 1 40 There are fifteen different polarities to choose from Each polarity is designated by a number This number needs to be programmed into the appropriate loca
258. s will extinguish and the codepad will give one short beep If a zone is not sealed at the end of exit time the zone will be automatically isolated It will become an active part of the system again as soon as it has resealed ie If a window is left open after exit time has expired the window will not be an active part of the system until it has closed Opening the window after exit time has expired will cause an alarm condition Forced Arming The feature of arming the system when a zone is not sealed is known as forced arming To enable forced arming Option 1 in LOCATION 665 on page 152 will need to be enabled If the STAY indicator does not illuminate and a long beep is heard forced arming is not permitted If this is the case you must ensure that all zones are sealed or manually isolated before you can arm the system ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Indicators and Operations 39 Disarming The System From STAY Mode 2 There are two methods for disarming the system from STAY Mode 2 Method one is standard and will always operate Method two is optional and requires to be enabled in LOCATION 670 on page 159 Note Method two will not operate unless Enable Single Button Arming In AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 has also been enabled Method One How To Disarm The System From STAY Mode 2 1 Enter your cone followed by the STAY button Two beeps will be heard and the STAY in
259. sarM 159 Enable Single Button Arming oooconconccnonconcnncinnnnnn 159 Enable Single Button Disarming o ooncnicnicnncnnnnnn 159 From AWAY Modein norisei 35 Latching Input For Arm Disarm In AWAY Model61 163 Momentary Input Arm Disarm In AWAY Model61 162 STAY Modena 37 STAY Mode Zinc 39 DMTF Command Module Options eeneg 160 Domestic Dialling ooooononnncnnonicnnocnonnconncnncnnnonnnonnncnnnoo 27 Acknowledge nnna niare 79 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited 221 Busy Tone Detection ooonoooncniocnocnnocononcnanonnonnnconoo 166 Disable Via Master Code 78 Kiss Off Detection ooooocnncnicnnocncocnconoonncnrncnnncnncnnnos 166 OM aii E 79 Program Phone Numbet s cccsseeseeeteeeees 54 78 DTMF Command Module 185 Allow Access Into Programming Mode 160 Allow Access To Installer Code Functions 160 Allow Master Code Functions ooooonocoincnicncocnconccnnos 160 Arm Disarm Auxiliary Code Operations 160 Establish Communication Lmk 22 Operations ii eia i RR RA R 67 PLOQTAMMING ee n a aeae aa E ea EE 22 Duress A AU ta E ne 40 RO aiii 116 E E2 Faltan taa 43 EDMSAT Satellite Siren 127 EDMSAT Satellite Siren 184 EDMSTU Securitel Interface 184 EDMSTU Securitel Interface 127 Eight Channel Output Board s es 185 196 Eight Zone Expansion Board 3K3 EOL 185 195 Eight Zone Expansion Board Variable EOL 185 195
260. sealed at the end of exit time will not transmit a Sensor Trouble report as the restore for that zone is still outstanding A Sensor Trouble restore report will be transmitted for burglary zones when the zone reseals or when the system is next disarmed which ever happens first A 24 hour zone will only transmit a restore signal when it has resealed The trouble code parameter is used as the expansion digit in 4 2 Format It has no effect on Contact ID Format as a Sensor Trouble report will always be reported on event code 380 A Sensor Trouble report will be transmitted on which ever dialler channel the respective zone has been allocated to when the control panel has been partitioned Note If Sensor Trouble reports are not required program LOCATION 472 475 with a zero Zone Trouble and Zone Trouble Restore reports will not be transmitted via securitel for software version 1 10 and software version 1 20 Trouble Codes For Zones 9 16 LOCATION 474 475 2lsl Location Description Alarm Or Expansion Code In 4 2 Format Restore Code In 4 2 Format Table 58 Zone Trouble Codes For Zones 9 16 Refer to Trouble Codes For Zones 1 8 for more information Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 116 Solution 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual Codepad Duress LOCATION 476 479 sta Location Description Contact ID Event Code Tens Digit Or Alarm Or Expansion Digit In 4 2 F
261. sh only to transmit an AC Fail report and ignore the mains failure on the codepad New Software Version 1 30 Onwards enable Option 4 in LOCATION 668 on page 156 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC A4 Solution 14 Solutidon 14 Safecom Installation Manual ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Functions This Section Includes The Following e Installer Code Functions Master Code Functions e User Code Function e Hold Down Functions 46 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual System Functions This section deals with the more advanced features that are required for testing and regular maintenance of the system Features such as Installer Code Functions Master Code Functions and Hold Down Functions are covered in this section Installer Code Functions Installer Code Functions are designed to allow the installer to perform various system tests without the need to know a Master Code To enter the required installer code function enter the INsTALLER cone followed by the required FUNCTION digit and the Away button INSTALLER CODE FUNCTION AWAY These functions can only be carried out when the system is in the disarmed state Function Description Set The Number Of Days Until The First Test Report O 3 Event Memory Recall Mode a Walk Test Mode 5 Satellite Siren Service Mode EDMSAT Turning Telephone Mon
262. should use options 8 15 Note Zones which trigger for more than 10 seconds continuously will be considered unsealed and cause an alarm condition irrespective of any zone pulse count or zone time settings Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 110 Solution 16 Solutiaon 16 Safecom Installation Manual Day Alarm LOCATION 336 H Option Day Alarm Zone 1 LOCATION 337 Lo Day Alarm Zone Table 53 Day Alarm Zones 5 8 Day alarm enables a combination of zones to be monitored while the system is in the disarmed state Indications are available via any of the programmable outputs including the codepad buzzer This function has been expanded to accommodate latching and non latching day alarm output event types Refer to Output Event Types 0 14 and 0 15 on page 128 for further information on programming an output for monitoring day alarm zones When the system has been armed in the AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 STAY Mode 2 zones that have been programmed as day alarm zones will activate the sirens and dialler just as non day alarm zones do When day alarm has been activated it will ignore any zone pulse count settings that have been programmed for that zone ie Zone pulse count is only relevant when the system has been armed Day Alarm Resetting An output that is programmed as Day Alarm Resetting will operate when a zone programmed for day alarm has been triggered The output will reset when the zone h
263. sion 1 20 1 40 on page 134 or Table 71 Event Type Polarities Only For Software Version 1 10 on page 135 This determines whether the output remains operating for the duration of the event pulses for the duration operates once only one shot or latches on Is determined by a time base and a multiplier Refer to Timing on page 136 for further details Is determined by a time base and a multiplier Refer to Timing on page 136 for further details Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programmable Outputs Output Configurations Output I Location 540 545 Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For EDMSAT Operation Output 2 7 Sp 546 551 Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For EDMSTU Operation Output 3 Location 552 557 Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Smoke Reset Operation The following outputs are available via an optional plug on 8 Channel Output Expansion Board CC884 Output 7 Location 576 581 H Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Siren Operation Area 1 Output 8 Location 582 587 a Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Strobe Operation Area 1 Output 9 Location 588 593 a Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Siren Operation Area 2 Output 10 Location 594 599 a Event Polarity Time Time Type Base Multiplier Default For Strobe Operat
264. smission Is Complete If this option has been enabled the horn speaker bell strobe and EDMSAT outputs will not activate until the base station receiver has sent a Kiss Off back to the control panel after the message has been transmitted If multiple messages are transmitted the sirens will activate after the last Kiss Off has been sent If the transmission back to the base station was unsuccessful and a Kiss Off was not received the horn speaker bell strobe and EDMSAT outputs will activate after the third call attempt 24 hour alarms are not effected by this option The sirens will always activate immediately upon a 24 hour alarm 2 Enable Resetting Of Sirens From All Areas Partitioned Systems Only This option is only applicable when the control panel has been partitioned If this option has been enabled any valid user code from any area will be able to stop the horn speaker strobe bell and EDMSAT outputs from operating This option does not allow a user code allocated from one area to disarm another area 4 Enable Auto Arming In AWAY Mode If automatic arming in AWAY Mode is preferred to automatic arming in STAY Mode 1 this option will need to be enabled When the system has been partitioned ALL areas will automatically arm in AWAY Mode 8 Enable Auto Arming In STAY Mode 1 If automatic arming in STAY Mode 1 is preferred to automatic arming in the AWAY Mode this option will need to be enabled When the system has been parti
265. ss the Installer s Programming Mode The STAY and AWAY indicator s will now flash simultaneously Refer to LOCATION 56 62 on page 98 for the locations of the factory default Installer Code The factory default Installer Code is za Enter the Primary Telephone Number and the Secondary Telephone Number followed by the Subscriber ID Number If required program the test reporting time and any other programming changes to be made otherwise the programmed factory default settings will be used Enter command 9 76 70 followed by the away button to exit the Installer s Programming Mode The control panel will return to the disarmed state and is now ready for use Refer to page 42 for information on any system faults that may have occurred Using a Master Code set the date and time Refer to Master Code Functions on page 50 for more information on setting the date and time Zone Number Zone Type Gier 23 45 6789 16 P Hor SSCS Table 1 Zone Defaults The factory default settings allow the control panel to communicate in Contact ID Format operating eight zones For further information on the factory default settings refer to the Programming Sheets on page 209 at the back of the installation manual If sixteen zones are required refer to LOCATION 339 on page 112 for setting the split EOL resistor value or LOCATION 672 to enable the zone expansion board if required on page 161 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limi
266. system is ready to be armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 STAY CODE STAY ZONE NUMBER STAY ZONE NUMBER STAY AWAY As each zone is isolated the corresponding ZONE indicator will begin to flash Ifa mistake is made press the zone number that was incorrectly entered followed by the STAY button This zone is now no longer isolated and the ZONE indicator will extinguish Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 42 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Fault Analysis Mode Whenever a system fault occurs the FAULT or MAINS indicator will flash and the codepad will beep once every minute If the MAINS indicator is flashing this is because the AC mains has been disconnected There is no need to determine this type of system fault Pressing the away button for two seconds will acknowledge the AC mains fault and will stop the codepad beeping once every minute How To Determine The Type Of System Fault To determine the type of system fault that has occurred enter Fault Analysis Mode by following the procedures below 2 Hold down the s button until two beeps are heard The FAULT indicator should remain steady and the STAY and AWAY indicators should flash in unison with each other The type of system fault will be indicated by the ZONE indicators Refer to the Table 13 Fault Indicators for the list of different system faults
267. t MAINS System Disarmed Zone 4 AWAY Indicator Illuminates Alarm In Zone 4 Zone 3 AWAY Indicator Illuminates Alarm In Zone 3 AWAY Indicator Illuminates System Armed In AWAY Mode Table 22 Event Memory Recall Example Event Playback Each event is indicated by a beep and an illuminated indicator Resetting a 24 hour alarm in the disarmed state is indicated by one beep only After the last event three beeps will be heard to indicate the end of playback The replay can be terminated at any time by pressing the AWAY button Note If the control panel has been powered down the memory of all events will be lost Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 56 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual 4 Walk Test Mode Walk test mode allows you to test detection devices to ensure that they are functioning correctly This should be performed on a weekly basis Before activating walk test mode isolate any zones that are not required for testing Refer to Isolating Zones on page 41 for more information on isolating zones How To Enter Walk Test Mode 1 Enter your master cope followed by A and the AWAY button Three beeps will be heard and the STAY and AWAY indicators will begin to flash The codepad will beep once every second while the system is in the walk test mode Za Unseal and seal the zones to be tested The codepad will sound a long beep and the horn speaker will sound a short bee
268. te Arming the system in STAY Mode 1 will only sound the three beeps when carried out via a keyswitch interface The two JP5 pins do not have access to this feature When using the Night Arm Station CP105 to arm in STAY Mode 1 if this option has been enabled three horn speaker beeps will be heard to indicate that the system has been armed in STAY Mode 1 When using RE005 the transmitters must be programmed for single button Arm Disarm if Speaker beeps are required ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Option Bits 153 System Options 2 LOCATION 666 2 Description Enable Radio Key Keyswitch Interface Or Night Arm Station Enable Handover Delay To Be Sequential Enable Codepad Panic To Be Silent Enable Codepad Tamper To Be Silent Table 103 System Options 2 Enable Radio Key Keyswitch Interface or Night Arm Station This option must be selected when using the Radio Key Keyswitch Interface CC813 Night Arm Station CP105 or the 2 Channel Radio Interface RE005 This option allows the control panel to be operated using either of these two accessories 2 Enable Handover Delay To Be Sequential If this option has been enabled handover delay will be sequential ie In numerical order from lowest to highest If the sequence is broken before the entry time expires an alarm will occur If this option is not enabled handover delay will follow the entry path provided that a delay zone has been trigg
269. ted ISSUE210 DOC 16 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Telepermit Note The grant of a Telepermit for a device in no way indicates Telecom acceptance of responsibility for the correct operation of that device under all operating conditions This equipment shall not be used in any manner that could constitute a nuisance to other Telecom customers Immediately disconnect this equipment should it become physically damaged and arrange for its disposal or repair The preferred method of dialling is to use DTMF tones as this is faster than pulse Decadic dialling In some situations there may be difficulties with DTMF signalling as this control panel is not fully compatible with the Telecom Telephone Network In this case you must use decadic dialling and your control panel must be set up to record numbers using the following translation table as it does not implement the New Zealand Reverse Dialling standard oo O Number to be dialled 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Number to be programmed 9 8 J 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Note that where DTMF dialling is used the numbers should be entered normally The transmit level from this device is set as a fixed level and because of this there may be circumstances where the performance is less than optimal Before reporting such occurrences as faults please check the line with a standard telepermitted telephone ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming This Section
270. ted when the system has been disarmed If bypass restore is not programmed it can be assumed that 1t will transmit a bypass restore report when an opening report is transmitted All bypassed zones are automatically cleared when the system has been disarmed The bypass code parameter is used as the expansion digit in 4 2 Formats It has no effect on Contact ID Format as a zone bypass will always be reported on event code 570 A Zone Bypass report will be transmitted on which ever dialler channel the respective zone has been allocated to when the system has been partitioned Note If Zone Bypass reports are not required program LOCATION 468 471 with a zero Bypass Codes For Zones 9 16 LOCATION 470 471 Lo Location Description Alarm Or Expansion Code In 4 2 Format Restore Code In 4 2 Format Table 56 Zone Bypass Codes For Zones 9 16 Refer to Bypass Codes For Zones 1 8 for more information ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited System Status Information 115 Trouble Codes For Zones 1 8 LOCATION 472 473 Lo Location Description Alarm Or Expansion Code In 4 2 Format Restore Code In 4 2 Format Table 57 Zone Trouble Codes For Zones 1 8 A zone is in trouble when it is unsealed at the end of exit time A Sensor Trouble report Contact ID Event Code 380 will be transmitted to indicate that one or more zones have been automatically isolated by the system 24 hour zones that are un
271. that may occur Zone Indicator Fault Description a Hom Speaker Disconnected 5 Telephone Line Fale a 222222 Zone 16 In Alarm Partitioned Systems Only a Communications Failure Table 13 Fault Indicators To exit fault analysis mode press the away button The STAY and AWAY indicators will extinguish and the FAULT indicator will remain illuminated How To Acknowledge The System Fault 1 To acknowledge the system fault press the away button The FAULT indicator will remain illuminated and the codepad will cease its once a minute beep Fault Descriptions Low Battery A low battery fault will register when the battery supply voltage falls below 10 5 volts or when a dynamic battery test detects a low capacity battery This fault will clear after a successful dynamic battery test A dynamic battery test is performed every four hours once power has been connected to the control panel and also every time the system is armed in AWAY Mode STAY Mode 1 and STAY Mode 2 Date and Time The date and time fault will register every time the control panel has been powered down This fault will clear after the date and time has been programmed Refer to Setting The Date and Time on page 58 for further information on setting the date and time Sensor Watch A sensor watch fault will register because one of the detection devices has stopped working or has failed to detect movement for the programmed time period whilst the contro
272. the button to display the control panel s software version number Two beeps will be heard Press the button to exit this command ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 29 Disable Factory Default LOCATION 900 Al The system has a feature that prevents the control panel from being manually defaulted via the default button or by using a programming key Any number between 0 14 programmed into this location will allow defaulting of the control panel If 15 has been programmed into this location defaulting of the control panel will not operate and the Installer Code MUST be used for further programming of the control panel If the Installer Code is not known the control panel will need to be returned to your EDM Distributor for exchange A nominal fee applies for this service Warning Electronics Design and Manufacturing Pty Limited does not recommend the use of this feature If this option is required a special programming procedure has been introduced to eliminate any possibility of accidentally setting this option The default button on the PCB must be held down while programming this location How To Prevent Manval Defaulting Of The Control Panel Plug the hand held programmer to the pins provided on the PCB Disarm the system Access Installer s Programming Mode Go to LOCATION 900 Hold down the default button Program a 15 into LOCATION 900 Release the default button
273. the button to exit the Installer s Programming Mode Now remove the programming key from the control panel SE e SE How To Erase The Programming Key Using The Hand Held Programmer 1 Before connecting the hand held programmer to the control panel make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer 1s in the EXT position 2 Enter the Installer s Programming Mode Plug the programming key onto the pins marked EXTERNAL KEY on the hand held programmer Enter command efeja followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the programming keys data has now been deleted Enter command 2lelo followed by the button to exit Installer s Programming Mode 6 Now disconnect the programming key from the hand held programmer il ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Programming 27 Command 965 Set Up Domestic Dialling Format Command 965 has been added to make the set up of the Domestic Dialling Format a one step operation Refer to page 78 for more information on Domestic Reporting After Installer s Programming Mode has been accessed enter command Lejes followed by the button This will automatically set the following locations in bold below No other locations will be altered when command 965 has been issued Location Description Setting 2 0 0 0 0 3 0 1 Delay 1 0 0 0 0 Not Used 0 0 0 0 E ot Used Location 476 479 Codepad Duress 0 0 0 0 im Used 0 0 0 0 Not Used
274. the programming key s data has now been copied to the control panel Enter command 2lelol followed by the button to exit Installer s Programming Mode Now disconnect the programming key from the control panel How To Copy The Programming Key Memory To The Control Panel Using The Hand Held Programmer 1 2 gi Before connecting the hand held programmer to the control panel make sure that the switch on the hand held programmer is in the EXT position Enter the Installer s Programming Mode Plug the programming key onto the pins marked EXTERNAL KEY on the hand held programmer Enter command ooa followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the programming keys data will now be copied to the control panel Enter command 000 followed by the button to exit the Installer s Programming Mode Leave the switch on the hand held programmer in the EXT position and disconnect the programming key Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 26 Solution 14 Solution 14 Safecom Installation Manual Command 964 Erase Programming Key This command erases all data from the programming key How To Erase The Programming Key Enter the Installer s Programming Mode Connect the programming key onto the pins marked PROGRAMMING KEY on the control panel Enter command OO followed by the button Two beeps will be heard and the programming keys data has now been deleted Enter command 2lelol followed by
275. the system is armed in STAY Mode 1 24 Hour Burglary Zone 24 Hour Burglary zone is always ready to trigger the horn speaker bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed state 24 Hour Fire Zone A 24 Hour Fire zone is always ready to trigger the horn speaker bell and strobe regardless of whether the system is in the armed or disarmed state A distinct fire sound is emitted through the horn speaker to indicate this type of alarm condition This fire sound is completely different to the burglary sound Chime Zone Follow Me A Chime zone is not a burglary zone It can never sound the sirens or trigger the dialler Its purpose is to map it to a programmable output for an indication of sealed or unsealed Refer to Output Event Type 4 5 on page 132 Chime zones require EOL resistors and they will register at a remote codepad These zones do not effect the operation of forced arming Zone Not Used If a zone is not used program it as a zone type of 15 This zone will never sound the sirens or trigger the dialler An EOL resistor is not required if this zone type is used ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Zone Programming 107 Zone Options Option Description Lockout Dialler 2 Silent Alarm Table 49 Zone Options 1 amp 2 Lockout Siren amp Lockout Dialler Lockout means one activation per arming cycle ie A zone programmed for Lockout can only cause the si
276. tion 16 Solutiaon 164 Safecom Installation Manual LOCATION 650 653 olololg Location Description Actual Hour Of The Day Tens Digit Actual Hour Of The Day Units Digit Table 89 Auto Arming Locations This time parameter is used to select the actual time of the day that the system will automatically arm itself in the AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 This time must be set in 24 hour format ie 10 30 PM would be programmed as 2230 Refer to LOCATION 668 on page 155 and page 156 for selecting whether the control panel should arm in the AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 If forced arming has been disabled the feature of auto arming will operate regardless of zones being sealed or unsealed If the control panel has been partitioned ALL areas will automatically arm If automatic arming is not required program LOCATION 650 653 with zeros Auto Arming Pre Alert Timer LOCATION 654 5 Location Description 654 Pre Alert Timer In 1 Minute Increments Table 90 Auto Arming Pre Alert Timer Locations This is the time period before the control panel will automatically arm itself The codepad will beep once every second until the pre alert timer has expired after which time the system will arm in the AWAY or STAY Mode 1 Once the control panel has automatically armed in the AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 exit time will commence If a valid user code has been entered during the pre alert time the auto arming time as programmed in LOCATION 650
277. tion of the output being used to indicate how the output should operate Option Polarity Option Polarity ormally Low Going Open OutputNotUsed gt Normally Open GoingLow_________ __8 JN Normally Open PulsingLow LL 9 NormallyLow PulsingOpen Table 70 Event Type Polarities For Software Version 1 20 1 40 0 Output Not Used If an output is not required for use the polarity should be programmed as zero 1 Normally Open Going Low This polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs The output will switch back to open circuit when the event has restored Time parameters are not applicable to this polarity 2 Normally Open Pulsing Low This polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to pulsing zero volts when the event occurs It will switch back to open circuit when the event has restored Time parameters vary the On time of the pulse 3 Normally Open One Shot Low This one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs It will switch back to open circuit when the time parameter setting has expired This one shot time setting will always run its full duration and cannot be manually reset 4 Normally Open One Shot Low With Retrigger This one shot polarity is normally open circuit and will switch to zero volts when the event occurs Every time the event occurs it will restart the one shot timer The output will sw
278. tioned ALL areas will automatically arm in STAY Mode 1 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 156 Solution 16 Solutiaon 16 Safecom Installation Manual System Options 4 LOCATION 668 Software Version 1 20 Onwards 0 le Description Delay Siren Until Transmission Is Complete Enable Resetting Of Sirens From All Areas Partitioned Systems Ignore AC Mains Fail New From Software Version 1 30 Onwards Enable Auto Arming In STAY Mode 1 Table 106 System Options 4 Software Version 1 20 1 40 Delay Siren Until Transmission Is Complete If this option has been enabled the horn speaker bell strobe and EDMSAT outputs will not activate until the base station receiver has sent a Kiss Off back to the control panel after the message has been transmitted If multiple messages are transmitted the sirens will activate after the last Kiss Off has been sent If the transmission back to the base station was unsuccessful and a Kiss Off was not received the horn speaker bell strobe and EDMSAT outputs will activate after the third call attempt 24 hour alarms are not effected by this option The sirens will always activate immediately upon a 24 hour alarm 2 Enable Resetting Of Sirens From All Areas Partitioned Systems Only This option is only applicable when the control panel has been partitioned If this option has been enabled any valid user code from any area will be able to stop the horn spea
279. to disarm the system STAY Mode 2 is not available when the system has been partitioned therefore this hold down function does not operate when the system has been partitioned Horn Speaker Test Holding the D button down until two beeps are heard will sound the horn speaker for a two second burst No other sounding device will sound in this mode If An EDMSAT SS914 has been connected to the control panel this function will test the horn speaker for a two second burst followed by the strobe connected to the satellite siren Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited ISSUE210 DOC 62 Solution 14 Solutidon 14 Safecom Installation Manual 2 Bell Test Holding the 2 button down until two beeps are heard will sound the speakers for a two second burst No other sounding device will sound in this mode If an EDMSAT SS914 has been connected to the control panel this function will test the horn speaker for a two second burst followed by the strobe connected to the satellite siren 3 Strobe Test Holding the Al button down will operate the strobe No other device will operate in this mode If an EDMSAT SS914 has been connected to the control panel this function will also test the strobe on the satellite siren How To Turn Strobe Test ON 1 Hold down the Al button until three beeps are heard The strobe will begin to flash How To Turn Strobe Test OFF 1 Hold down the Al button until two beeps are heard The strob
280. to isolate zones is governed by the priority level allocated to each user code holder Some user code holders may not be able to isolate zones Refer to User Code Priority on page 99 for further details Twenty four hour zone types and zones not used cannot be isolated If isolation of these zones is attempted a long beep will be heard Standard Isolating 1 Press the LSTAY button twice Three beeps will be heard Enter the zone NUMBER required to be isolated Press the LSTAY button Enter the next zone NUMBER required to be isolated STAY Press the button Press the away button when finished selecting the zones to be isolated Two beeps will be heard SE E The isolated zones will now continue to flash until the system has next been disarmed The system is ready to be armed in AWAY Mode or STAY Mode 1 STAY STAY ZONE NUMBER STAY ZONE NUMBER STAY AWAY Code To Isolate 1 Press the LSTAY button 2 Enter your cone 3 Press the LSTAY J button Three beeps will be heard Enter the ZONE NUMBER required to be isolated Press the LSTAY button Enter the next ZONE NUMBER required to be isolated STAY Press the button Press the away button when finished selecting the zones to be isolated Two beeps will be heard e A Se YE The isolated zones will now continue to flash until the system has next been disarmed The
281. ue Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Indicator Table 2 Zone Indicators When Programming Example To enter Installer s Programming Mode enter the INsTaLLeR cone followed by the away button The factory default Installer s Code is Heei Two beeps will be heard and the codepad will display the current data stored in LOCATION 000 To go to a particular location enter the required followed by the Away button The data of the new location will now be displayed To move to the next location press the away button This will step you to the next location and the data in that location will be displayed via the ZONE indicators If you press the STAY J button without previously entering a location number the system will step back one location To change data at the current location enter the new value 0 15 followed by the STAY button This will store the new data into the location and still leave you positioned at the same location To proceed to the next location press the away button The next locations data will now be displayed To exit the Installer s Programming Mode enter command 9 76 70 followed by the away button Two beeps will be heard and the system will return back to normal operation Refer to Installers Programming Commands on page 23 for further information on commands that can be performed during access of the Installer s Programming Mode Electronics Design
282. uring Pty Limited System Indicators and Operations This Section Includes The Following e The Codepad e Zone Indicators e AWAY Indicator e STAY Indicator e MAINS Indicator e FAULT Indicator e Audible Indicators e LCD Codepad Indicators e Arming The System In AWAY Mode e Disarming The System From AWAY Mode e Arming The System In STAY Mode 1 e Disarming The System From STAY Mode 1 e Arming The System In STAY Mode 2 e Disarming The System From STAY Mode 2 e Codepad Duress Alarm e Codepad Panic Alarm e Codepad Fire Alarm e Codepad Medical Alarm e Isolating Zones Fault Analysis Mode 32 Solution 14 Solutidon 14 Safecom Installation Manual System Indicators and Operations The Codepad S The codepad is the communications interface between you and your Solution alarm system It allows you to issue commands and offers both visual and audible indications that guide you through the general operation The codepad incorporates numerous indicators There are ZONE indicators which are used to show the condition of each zone and four others for general status The following is a list of situations and the relevant indications that will be seen STAY MAINS FAULT AWAY Figure 1 CP5 Eight Zone Codepad Zone Indicators The ZONE indicators are used to show the status of the zones The following table list the various circumstances that the indicators will display ie Zone Sealed Zone Unsealed In
283. used This makes it extremely difficult for anyone to tamper with the system The EOL resistor value for the zones can be chosen from any of the different values listed If 16 zones are required an EDM Zone Expansion Board will be required to be fitted to the control panel and enabled in LOCATION 672 on page 161 If split EOL resistors have been selected the control panel will look for sixteen EOL resistors consisting of 3K3 resistors for zones 8 and 6K8 resistors connected in parallel for zones 9 16 The zone 1 termination on the PCB becomes the termination for zones and 9 Note Caution should be exercised when using split EOL resistors to create 16 zones This configuration is only suitable for normally closed contacts If normally open contacts are used as is the case with most types of smoke detectors a short circuit on one zone will trigger both zones connected in parallel If there is a requirement to use a normally open contact with split EOL program either the primary or secondary zone as not used If split EOL resistors are not suitable there is a choice of two eight zone expansion boards that can be purchased and fitted to the control panel The Eight Zone Expansion Board CC883 can be programmed for different resistor values whereas the Eight Zone Expansion Board CC885 is fixed for 3K3 EOL resistors These eight zone expansion boards provide additional terminations for zones 9 16 Refer to LOCATION 672 on page 161 to
284. uttons in the same horizontal row on a codepad are pressed simultaneously This is an audible alarm Refer to LOCATION 666 on page 153 if you require codepad panic to be silent If Installer s Programming Mode has been entered and a codepad panic alarm has been triggered the Installer s Programming Mode will be terminated as the panic alarm has priority Note Restore signals are not transmitted for this event If a Panic Alarm report is not required program the dialler channel LOCATION 483 with a zero Software Version 1 37 Onwards A Panic Alarm report Contact ID Event Code 120 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when either the two outside buttons YJ and 3 or stay and AWAY are pressed simultaneously This is an audible alarm Refer to LOCATION 666 on page 153 if you require codepad panic to be silent A Fire Alarm report Contact ID Event Code 110 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the Al and e buttons are pressed simultaneously This is an audible alarm A Medical report Contact ID Event Code 100 will be transmitted to the base station receiver when the H and j buttons are pressed simultaneously This is an audible alarm Note To disable both the reporting and the audible alarms for ALL codepad alarm events the dialler channel for Codepad Panic in LOCATION 483 will need to be programmed as zero and enable Enable Codepad Panic To Be Silent in LOCATION 666 on page 153 E
285. via Alarm Link Software CC816 and telephone remote arming will remain operational regardless of this setting as long as a communication dialler hybrid has been fitted to the control panel Disable Dialler Reporting Functions If this option is not enabled the communication dialler will not operate Upload Download via Alarm Link Software CC816 and telephone remote arming will remain operational regardless of this setting as long as a communication dialler hybrid has been fitted to the control panel Safecom reporting will still function as normal with the dialler disabled 2 Enable Remote Arming Via The Telephone If this option has been enabled you can arm your control panel via a standard telephone using a Phone Controller CC911 Refer to Remote Arming Via The Telephone on page 66 for more information Forced arming is automatically assumed when this feature is being used Refer to Option 1 in LOCATION 665 on page 152 for further details on forced arming A communication dialler hybrid must be fitted to the control panel for this feature to operate Whether the reporting functions of the dialler have been enabled or disabled Refer to Option 1 of this location this will have no effect on remote arming via the telephone Refer to Ring Count on page 96 for programming the number of rings before the control panel will answer an incoming call 4 Enable Upload Download Via Alarm Link Software This option will need to be enabled if you
286. well as a DC LED indicator and AC mains fail output For situations requiring an uninterrupted power source a rechargeable sealed lead acid battery can be fitted In the event of a mains failure the power supply will switch to battery power without interrupting the load being supplied TF008 Plug Pack TFO08 The TF008 plug packs have been designed to be used with the EDM control panels and the PS100 Power Supply Module The plug pack includes built in thermal fuses which under overload or fault conditions will blow and eliminate any possible fire threat due to excessive heat build up inside the casing The TF008 plug pack incorporates a three wire flying lead that enables a mains earth connection to be made between the equipment and the plug pack This connection may be required for lightning protection on equipment that is connected to phone lines or for safety reasons such as earthing of metal enclosures ISSUE210 DOC Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Optional Equipment 187 Solution Codepad Mimic Board CC820 The Solution Codepad Mimic Board CC820 has been designed to allow you to have a separate output indicator for each indicator found on the remote codepad This will be useful to remotely display system status information Solution Relay Output Interface CC892 The Solution Relay Output Interface CC892 has been designed to allow up to an additional 8 relay outputs to be connected to a Solution control panel
287. witch Interface 187 UU 187 Enable ata a Aids 153 Receivers and Their Formats 95 Remote Operations Arming Via Telephone 66 150 DTMF Command Module Operations o 67 Upload Download ooooooociccnionononcoonconnconnnnncconcnnonnnonnss 69 Reporting Formats A te eee ees ie 75 ATA Remakel 75 42 BOM Eege eeler ls te 75 Basi Pagere neenon 8 teeta tee ee ate eh 84 Contact Here 72 DS OS AR a 78 PET Alpha Paget nerne as 85 SIE 77 Synthesised Voice Reporting oooooncciocnnonconnconncnnonns 80 Resistor Value siai snan arrena aaea 112 RE Faile aa ies 121 UE et 121 RF Supervision Time ccccescesseesceeseeeteeeeeeseeeeeeees 142 Ring Count edd 96 A Safecom Interface taa 199 Remote Arming Via ST1000 Base 165 Remote Disarming Via ST1000 Base 165 O A ee e 121 RE Jammin recia 121 RF Supervision Time ooocccoccnocnnononononononnnonnnonnonnnonos 142 Telco Palin 121 Satellite Suen 127 184 Service Mode ita a dit 48 Secondary Telephone Number 93 Secuela end a ieee T e 77 127 Partonmg 171 Sensor Watch 42 108 113 120 Electronics Design amp Manufacturing Pty Limited Index Emmel ee 142 Sensor Watch Time tt 142 Seral Printers tds 127 Logging Event crio 89 Program Output BAUD Rate 0 eee eeeeeeneeeneees 89 Reporting Messages cc cceccessessseeseeeeeseeseeeteeesees 90 Wiring Diagram concro o i 197 Silent Alarmna nin iair a E 107 Siren Allow Resetting From All Areas eee 155

Solution-16/ Solution-16 Safecom Installation Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents